smhma-11 - hyundai...restraint system control module (srscm) or airbag control unit (acu), may...

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A02O-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at anytime so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

A030A01O-A

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

A110A01A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems that help to ensureyour vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that you expect. These systems utilize computersto monitor the operation of various systems and components and help to control their operation. Thesecomputerized system operations are wide-ranging and involve components to reduce emissions, to continuouslyevaluate the readiness of the airbag and seat belt pretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag and seatbelt pre-tensioner systems should be deployed and then to activate the deployment, and if equipped, to operateanti-lock braking, traction control and electrical stability control to assist the driver to control the vehicle in difficultdriving situations. These systems electronically store information that is useful to service technicians when theyneed to diagnose and repair these systems. Additional information is stored only when a crash occurs that resultsin the deployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storage is done by devices calledevent data recorders(EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as the SupplementalRestraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), may record some information aboutthe condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. This information consists of data related to seat beltusage and if there was diagnostic information in the airbag or seat belt systems at the time that a crash occurred,and if the ACU sensed that a crash of sufficient severity occurred to require seat belt pre-tensioner or airbagdeployment.

To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores thedata is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or share it with others except:

o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, oro with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, oro as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, oro as required by law.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A04O-AAT

B250A01O-A

1. Multi-Function Light Switch2. Instrument Cluster3. Horn and Driver's Airbag4. Trip Switch / Trip Computer Switch (If installed)5. Ignition Switch6. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch7. Hazard Warning Light Switch8. Digital Clock9. Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator Light10.Rear Window Defroster Switch11.Audio System (If installed)12.Passenger's Airbag

13.Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)14.Hood Release Lever15.Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)16.Traction Control System Switch (If installed)17.Cruise Control Switch (If installed)18.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever19.Ashtray20.Parking Brake Lever21.Shift Lever22.Power Outlet23.Cigarette Lighter24.Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed)25.Glove Box

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A03O-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-48.

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Malfunction Indicator LightSeat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)

4WD System Warning Light (If installed)

Traction Control Indicator Lights (If installed)

Cruise SET Indicator Light (If installed)

Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed)

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8Power Windows .......................................................... 1-11Seats ........................................................................... 1-12Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-19Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-26Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ........................................................... 1-34Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-46Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-48Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-55Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-57Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-60Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-69Mirror ........................................................................... 1-73Hood Release ............................................................. 1-85Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-89Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-92Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-109Audio System............................................................ 1-111Antenna ..................................................................... 1-138

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A04A-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

!

B010A01O

UNLEADED

FUEL ONLY

! CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.


3KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01A-AAT

B030A01HR

For greater convenience, the same key oper-ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,because the doors can be locked without a key,carrying a spare key is recommended in caseyou accidentally lock one key inside the car.


4 DOOR LOCKS

!B040A02Y-AATB030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH(If installed)

Whenever either front door is opened, the igni-tion switch will be illuminated for your conve-nience, provided the ignition switch is not in the"ON" position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

B030C01E-1

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be opened fromthe inside. This helps ensure that thedoors will not be opened accidentally.Also, when combined with the properuse of seat belts, locking the doors helpskeep occupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

o In case of accident, the door is unlockedautomatically (If installed).

B030B01A-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the number platethat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number plate should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01HR


5

B040B01O-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors with akey

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds.

HSM2003

LOCK UNLOCK

B040C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside(Driver's side-without key)

The door can be locked without a key. To lockthe door, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-tral door locking system, the door willnot lock if the key is left in the ignitionswitch when the front doors are closed.

o When locking the door this way, be care-ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors and the tail gatewhen leaving your vehicle unattended.

B040C01O


6

B045D01O-AAT

Locking From the Inside(Passenger's side)

The door can be locked without a key. To lockthe door, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.


passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, all doors can be locked.

o If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-tral door locking system, the door willnot lock if the key is left in the ignitionswitch when the front doors are closed.

o When locking the door this way, be care-ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

To lock the door from the inside, simply close thedoor and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the passenger's inside door handles can beused.

HSM362-D

LOCK

UNLOCK

B045C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside(Passenger's side-without key)

B040C01O-D

B040D01O-AAT

Locking From the Inside(Driver's side)

To lock the door from the inside, simply close thedoor and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position.


driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even if thelock switch is depressed.

HSM362

UNLOCK

LOCK

o To reduce the chances of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors and the tail gatewhen leaving your vehicle unattended.


7

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side"child-protector" rear door locks. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.

HSM170-1

B040G03O-AAT

Central Door Locks (If installed)

The central door locking switch is located on thedriver's arm rest. It is operated by depressingeither the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" of the door lockswitch.

B040G01O-A


passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, all doors can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

To engage the child-protector feature so thatthe door cannot be opened from the inside,move the child-protector lever to the " "position and close the door. Move the lever tothe " " position when normal door operationis desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

NOTE:o When pushing the "LOCK" of the driver's

door lock switch, all vehicle doors willlock. If any door is open when the switchis depressed, the door will remain lockedwhen closed.

o When pushing the "UNLOCK" of theswitch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

o If the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

B070F03O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion.


8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B075B01O-AAT

Armed Stage

B075B01O

LOCK

UNLOCK

B070A01A-AAT

(If installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stageand the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal lights.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-ter.

2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicatethat the system is disarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter againwithin 4 seconds. Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the

system as described below.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

!NOTE:o The transmitter will not work if any of

following occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be block-

ing the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Hyundai Dealer.

o Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orliquids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer vehicle warranty.


9

B075C01JM-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The tail gate is opened without using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

3) The hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for about 30 seconds (Thiswill repeat 3 times). To turn off the system,unlock the door or tail gate using the transmitteror the ignition key.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarmmay be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

!

!

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2) Make sure that the hood and tail gate areclosed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

NOTE:o If any door, the tail gate or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed. If this happens, rearm the systemas previously described.

o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushing the"LOCK" button on the transmitter, thesiren will sound once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

B075D01JM-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed by using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

The driver's door is unlocked by depressingonce the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UN-LOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4seconds.

Whenever the step above is completed, the turnsignal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE:The system will rearm if a door, tail gate, orhood is not opened within 30 seconds.


10

B070E02HP-AAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will notlight. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facingdown), then insert it in the transmitter.

HSM327

B070E02A-1

Screwdriver

Case

Battery

B075E01O-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the transmitter.2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the

turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"

button again on the transmitter.

B075B01OPANIC


11POWER WINDOWS

!

B060A03Y-AAT

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. The main switchesare located on the driver's armrest and controlthe front and rear windows on both sides of thevehicle. The windows may be opened by de-pressing the appropriate window switch andclosed by pulling up the switch. To open thewindow on the driver's side, press the switch(1)halfway down. The window moves as long asthe switch is operated. To fully open the driver'swindow automatically, press the switch fullydown. In automatic operation, the window willfully open even if you let go of the switch. To stopat the desired opening, pull up and release theswitch.

In order to prevent operation of the passengerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch(2)is provided on the armrest of the driver's door.To disable the power windows, press the win-dow lock switch. To return normal operation,press the window lock switch a second time.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch.If the front doors are opened during this 30second period, the power windows can nolonger be operated without the ignition keyturned to the "ON" position.

WARNING:(1)Be careful that someone's head, hands

and body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

(2)Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for theirsafety.

HSM048

HSM050

(1)

HSM441-A

OpenClose

(2)

OpenClose


12

!

B080B02A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

B080B01O

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

B080C01O

WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.

SEATS

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

! WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving. This could result in lossof control or an accident which may causedeath, serious injury, or property damage.


13

! WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury in theevent of a collision or a sudden stop, boththe driver and passenger seatbacks shouldalways be in an upright position while thevehicle is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags in afrontal collision may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are reclined.There is greater risk that the driver andpassenger will slide under the seat beltwhich may result in serious injury if a crashoccurs when the seatbacks are reclined.The seat belt and airbags cannot provideproper protection to an occupant if the seatback is reclined.

!B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower theheadrest, push it down while pressing the lockknob. To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the lock knob while pullingupward. This should only be done when the seatis not occupied.

B080D01O

Lock knob

WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident the headrest should be ad-justed so the middle of the headrest is atthe same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occupantsmay occur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protection againstneck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest height whilethe vehicle is in motion.

B080D01JM


14

!

B080F01A-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the front knob forward or rear-ward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion, turn the rear knob forward or rear-ward.

B080F01O

B090A01Y-AAT

POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If installed)

The driver's seat can be adjusted appropriatelyby using the control knobs on the left side of theseat. Before driving, adjust the seat to theproper position so as to easily control thesteering wheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the same time.

WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat while

the vehicle is moving. This could resultin loss of control or an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe airbag.

!

B080E02A-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only)

To adjust the lumbar support, turn the handle onthe inboard side of the seat. To increase theamount of lumbar support, pull the lever for-ward. To decrease it, push the lever toward therear.

1. Minimum support2. Maximum support

B080E01O

12


15

B090B01Y-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

Pull the control knob forward or backward tomove the seat forward or backward to thedesired position. Release the knob and the seatwill remain at that position.

1. Seat Back Reclining Control Knob2. Seat Cushion Forward, Rearward and Height

Adjusting Control Knob

B090B01O

1

2

B090D02Y-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Rotate the upper portion of the control knobforward or backward to recline the seatback tothe desired position. Release the control knoband the seatback will remain in that position.

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

Move the front portion of the control knob up ordown to raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion. Move the rear portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion.

B090C01O B090D01O


16

!

B080G01FC-AAT

UNDER TRAY (If installed)

The tray is located under the front passenger'sseat. It is opened by up and pulling forward.

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the trayshould be kept closed when the car is inmotion.

HSM189

B100A01JM-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the frontseats during cold weather. With the ignition key inthe "ON" position, push either of the switches towarm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat.During mild weather or under conditions wherethe operation of the seat warmer is not needed,keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

o The seat warmer will not operate if theambient temperature is higher than82.4°F ± 3.5°F (28°C ± 3.5°C).

o If the seat warmer doesn't work whenambient temperature is lower than 75.2°F(24°C), it should be checked at an autho-rized dealer.

B340G01O

! WARNING:To minimize the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision or a sudden stop,both the driver's and passenger's seatbackshould remain in an upright position whilethe car is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags may bereduced significantly when the seatbacksare reclined. There is a greater risk that theseat occupants will slide under the beltresulting in serious injury if a crash occurswhen the seatbacks are reclined. The seatbelt and airbags cannot provide properprotection to an occupant if the seat backis reclined.


17

!B085A01O-BAT

REAR SEATAdjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, push the seatbackfolding lever toward the headrest, and releaseit after the desired seatback angle is achieved.When you recline the seatback to desired po-sition, always be sure it has locked into position.

CAUTION:When reclining the seatback, you shouldadjust the seatback folding lever whilestanding.

HSM288-A

!

Seatbackfolding lever

B085B02O-AAT

Folding Rear Seatback and SeatCushion

For convenience, the seatbacks and seat cush-ions may be folded down and up.

1. Remove the headrests.2. Pull strap to fold up the seat cushion.3. Push and hold the seatback folding lever (1)

inward, then push down the seatback.

HSM2043

(1)

Strap

WARNING:It is recommended that the seat heater notbe used when elderly people or people whoare ill occupy the seat. Also, do not use theseat warmer if the occupant is sleeping.


18

WARNING:o When folding down or returning the

seatback, always hold the seatback.Otherwise, the seatback could movesuddenly and result in unexpected in-jury.

o The purpose of the fold-up rear seatcushion and the fold-down rear seatback is to allow you to carry larger itemsthan could otherwise be accommodated.Never allow passengers to sit on thecargo area while the car is moving. Thisis not a proper seating position and noseat belts are available for use when theseat back is folded down.This could result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or a suddenstop. Objects should not extend higherthan the top of the front seatbacks.This could allow cargo to slide forwardand cause injury or damage during sud-den stops.

o Make sure that the headrests are prop-erly fixed in place to minimize the risk ofsevere injury in case of an accident.

!

4. Hook the securing loop under the seat cush-ion to the hanger on the backside of theseatback.

5. Insert the headrests between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

6. To return the seatback to its normal position,push the seatback folding lever and reversethe above procedure.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it is locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

B080D02O

Hanger

Securing loop

NOTE:o Before folding the seatback, place the

rear seat belt buckles in the buckle clipson the seatback. This will prevent theseat belt buckles from becoming cov-ered by the seat cushion when it isreturned to the seating position.

o The rear seat belt buckles must be re-moved from the buckle clips by pressingrelease button when in use.

HSM293-A

Buckle clips


19

!

SEAT BELTS

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-26.

!!B140A01B-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback.

B080P01O

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Note that this vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System as discussed beginningon page 1-34. The seat belts must be usedin conjunction with the supplementalairbag system. State laws require that someor all occupants of the vehicle use seatbelts. The possibility of increased injury orseverity of injury in an accident will beincreased if this elementary safety precau-tion is not observed. In addition, follow theother instructions provided in this section.

o When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down,be careful not to damage the seatbeltwebbing or buckle. In addition, do notallow the seatbelt webbing or buckle toget caught or pinched in the rear seat.

o When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position, be sure it is locked intoposition. Attempt to move it.

o Never attempt to fold or return seat whilethe vehicle is moving.

WARNING:


20

!B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVERplace a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snuglyas possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-26.


21

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crashyou could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-22.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

!


22

! WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the locked

position when the vehicle is moving.o Misadjustment of shoulder belt height

could reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt in a crash.

B180A01A-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt willlock into position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly.

NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe ignition key is in the "ON" position, theseat belt warning light will flash and thewarning chime will sound for approximatelysix seconds.

B170A04Y-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

B170A01E

B180A01L

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.


23

!

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergencylocking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, the seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passanger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System with CombinationLocking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor is also installedin the front passenger seat position, Hyundaistrongly recommends that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infantrestraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat beltoperation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-31.

WARNING:o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A

twisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!


24

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01L

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01L

(b)

B220D02O-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-PointSystem With Combination Locking Re-tractor

B220D01O-A

1. Pull the seatbelt out of the roof panel.2. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,

confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) arelatched together.

(a)(d)

(c)


25

3. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

B220D02O-A

(d)

(c)

There will be an audible "click" when the tablocks in the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyadjusts to the proper length only after the lap beltis adjusted manually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or impact, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

B220A02Y-D

! WARNING:o When using the rear seat center belt, you

must lock all metal tabs and buckles. Ifany metal tab or buckle is not locked, itwill increase the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) with the following excep-tions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.(2) If transporting an object on the rear

seat may cause damage to the rearseat center belt.


26

B220C02A-GAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt, pressthe button in the locking buckle.

B220C01O-A

! WARNING:When fastening the outboard seat belts orthe center seat belt, make sure they areinserted into the correct buckles to obtainmaximum protection from the seat beltsystem and assure proper operation.

!

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03O-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carseat and seat belts, and fits your child. Followall the instructions provided by the manufac-turer when installing the child restraint system.

B220D03O

(a)

(b)

o In case of unlocking metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b), place metal (a) in the seat beltclip not to make noise while driving.

o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b)immediately after folding rear seatbacksup.

WARNING:


27

!WARNING:o Always make sure that the shoulder belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder andnever across the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closer toward theseat belt buckle may help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt must always bepositioned as low as possible on thechild's hips, and as snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properly fit thechild.Before purchasing a booster seat, makesure that it meets applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards and thatit is satisfactory for use with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;it may not provide adequate security inan accident.

WARNING:o Never allow a child to be held in a person's

arms while they are in a moving vehicle,as this could result in serious injury tothe child in the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the child withany means of protection during an acci-dent, even if the person holding the childis wearing a seat belt.

!! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the luggage compartmentor fasten it with a safety belt so that it willnot be thrown forward in the case of asudden stop or an accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should sit in the rear seat and berestrained with the available lap/shoul-der belts. Never allow children to ride inthe front passanger seat.


28

B230C05O-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the"Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear luggage compartment floor.

HSM445

To install the child restraint seat tether

Tetheranchor cover

Child RestraintHook Holder

B230B02O

This symbol indicates the location of each userready tether anchorage.

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearluggage compartment floor.

B230B01E-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders for install-ing the child seat or infant seat.


29

!

B230D04E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seat withthe "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seats. These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachments thatconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at specificseating positions in your vehicle. This type ofchild seat eliminates the need to use seat beltsto attach the child seat for forward-facing childseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in theleft and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for thecenter rear seating position.

B230F01O

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to securethe seat.

WARNING:o Install the Child Restraint Seat fully rear-

ward against the seatback with theseatback in a vertical position, not re-clined.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

B230B01O-1Front of Vehicle

Tether StrapHook

ChildRestraintHookHolders

Rear luggage compartment floor

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the seatback.


30

!

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.

B230D02O-A

ISOFIXAnchor

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

HSM418-A

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint seat at the

center of the rear seat using the vehicle'soutboard rear seat ISOFIX anchors. TheISOFIX anchors are only provided for theleft and right outboard rear seating po-sitions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX an-chors by attempting to attach a childsafety seat in the middle of the rear seatposition to the ISOFIX anchors. In acrash, the child seat ISOFIX attachmentsmay not be strong enough to secure thechild restraint seat properly in the centerof the rear seat and may break, causingserious injury or death.

o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” sys-tem to install a child restraint system inthe rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seatbelt metal latch plates or tabs must belatched securely in their seat belt buck-les and the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraint toprevent the child from reaching and tak-ing hold of unretracted seat belts. Un-latched metal latch plates or tabs mayallow the child to reach the unretractedseat belts which may result in strangu-lation and a serious injury or death to thechild in the child restraint.

WARNING:o Do not mount more than one child re-

straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.


31

! WARNING:If the child restraint seat is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision greatly in-creases.

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIXor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint seat, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.Also, test the safety seat before you place thechild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also tryto tug the seat forward. Check to see if theanchors hold the seat in place.

B230G01O-AAT

Child Restraint System Installation onOutboard Rear Seats

To install a child restraint system in the outboardrear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theAutomatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

B230G01L

B230F01JM-AAT

Installation on Rear Seat Center Position

To install a child restraint system in the centerrear seat, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theAutomatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

B235G01O-A


32

When the pre-tensioner activates, if the systemsenses excessive seat belt tension on thedriver or passenger's seat belt, the load limiterinside the pre-tensioner will release some of thepressure on the affected seat belt.

B180B01O

Driver's airbag 1

2

3

Passenger'sairbag

B180C01O-AAT

Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.

HXG229

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turns orstops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

After installation of the child restraint system, tryto move it in all directions to be sure the childrestraint system is securely installed. If you needto tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward theretractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt andallow it to retract, the retractor will automaticallyrevert back to its normal seated passengerEmergency Locking usage condition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.


33

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision issevere enough, together with theairbags.The pre-tensioners will not be activatedif the seat belts are not being worn at thetime of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.3. Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear then properly.

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag

is connected with the pre-tensioner seatbelt. The SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds after the igni-tion key has been turned to the "ON"position, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag system.If the SRS airbag warning light does notilluminate when the ignition key is turnedto "ON" or if it remains illuminated afterapproximately 6 seconds, or if it illumi-nates while the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seat belts andSRS airbag system as soon as possible.

!

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washyour hands and face thoroughly after anaccident in which the pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated.

AIRBAG


34

The SRS uses sensors to gather informationabout the driver's and front passenger's seatposition, the driver's and front passenger's seatbelt usage and impact severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seat trackposition sensors, which are installed on the seattrack, determine if the seats are fore or aft of areference position. The seat belt buckle sen-sors determine if the driver and front passenger'sseat belts are fastened. These sensors providethe ability to control the SRS deployment basedon how close the driver's seat is to the steeringwheel, how close the passenger's seat is to theinstrument panel, whether or not the seat beltsare fastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to controlthe airbag inflation with two levels. A first stagelevel is provided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided for moresevere impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating posi-tion and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRSControl Module) controls the airbag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an accident.

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

B240A01O-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an advancedSupplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. Theindications of the system's presence are theletters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbagpad cover in the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel pad above theglove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's side frontpanel above the glove box. The purpose of theSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or thefront passenger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

B240A01O

Driver's Airbag

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts when drivingor riding in a motor vehicle.

! WARNING:


35

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or an occu-pant classification system is not workingproperly, the SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate be-cause the SRS airbag warning light is con-nected with the seat track position sensorand the occupant classification system. Ifthe SRS airbag warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, remains illuminated af-ter approximately 6 seconds when the igni-tion key is turned to the "ON" position, orif it illuminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the seat track position sensor andthe advanced SRS airbag system as soon aspossible.

!AIRBAG

Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with anoccupant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The occupant classificationsystem detects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classifi-cation System" later in this section.

! WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to thedriver's and the passenger's three pointseat belt systems and is not a substitutefor them. Therefore, your seat belts mustbe worn at all times. The airbags deployonly in certain frontal impact conditionssevere enough to cause significant in-jury to the vehicle occupants.

o Sitting too close to a front airbag canresult in serious or fatal injury if the frontairbags inflate. Always sit as far backfrom airbags as possible.

o Ignoring the SRS airbag warning lightcan result in serious or fatal injury if theairbags, occupant classification systemor pre-tensioners do not work properly.Have your car checked by a dealer as soonas possible if the SRS airbag warninglight alerts you to a potential problem.

o The SRS is designed to deploy the frontairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30° from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle. The frontairbags will not deploy in side, rear orrollover impacts. Additionally, theairbags will only deploy once. Seat beltsmust be worn at all times.

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track positionsensor and cause the airbag to deploy ata different level than should be pro-vided.

o Do not place any objects underneath thefront seats as they could damage theseat track position sensor or interferewith the occupant classification sys-tem.

o Do not place any objects that may causemagnetic fields near the front seat. Thesemay cause a malfunction of the seattrack position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided in the frontof the sun visor and in the glove box.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection in fron-tal crashes. Front airbags are not in-tended to deploy in collisions in whichsufficient protection can be provided bythe pre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.


36

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment of theairbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If older children (teen-agers and older) must ride in the frontseat, make sure they are always properlybelted and the seat is moved back as faras possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o Sitting improperly or out of position canresult in serious or fatal injury in a crash.All occupants should sit upright withthe seat back in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor until the ve-hicle is parked and the ignition key isremoved.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

! WARNING:!

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

WARNING:o Front airbags are not intended to deploy

in side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, front airbags willnot deploy in frontal crashes below thedeployment threshold.

B240D01O

Rear impact

Side ImpactRollover


37

B240B02O-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's Airbag Module2. Passenger's Airbag Module3. Knee Bolster4. Pre-tensioner Seat Belt5. Front Impact Sensor6. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt

Buckle Sensors7. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Track

Position Sensors8. SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)9. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)10.Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)11.Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)

B240B02O

11

1

27 10

7 9

5

6

4

348

3

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) onthe instrument panel will illuminate for about 6seconds after the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine is started, afterwhich the SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impactto the front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the front airbags.

B240B01L


38

! WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may be

a loud noise and fine dust will be re-leased throughout the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are not haz-ardous. However, the fine dust generat-ed during airbag deployment may causeskin irritation. Wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarm waterand a mild soap after an accident inwhich the airbags were deployed.

Passenger's Airbag

B240B05L

Passenger's Airbag

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel surface. If there is any leak-age from the air freshener onto these areas(instrument cluster, instrument panel or airventilator), it may damage these parts. If theliquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immedi-ately.

!

B240B01O

A fully inflated airbag, in combination with aproperly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, reducing therisk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility, and the ability to steer oroperate other controls.

B240B03L


39

!o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not illuminate, or contin-uously remains on after illuminating forabout 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, or afterthe engine is started, illuminates whiledriving, the SRS is not working properly.If this occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position and remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theairbag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.

WARNING:

the floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will be turned off and the frontpassenger's airbag will be able to inflate, ifnecessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator on the center facia panel. This systemdetects the conditions 1~4 in the following tableand activates or deactivates front passengerairbags based on these conditions.

Condition and operation in the front pas-senger occupant classification system

Frontpassenger

airbag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

Conditiondetected bythe occupantclassification

system1. Adult*1

2. Child*2 orchild restraintsystem*3

3. Unoccupied4. There is a

malfunctionin thesystem

SRSwarning

light

Off

Off

Off

On

"Passengerair bag off"

indicator light

Off

On

On

Off

*1)The system judges a person of adult size asan adult. When a smaller adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the system may recognizehim/her as a child depending on his/herphysique and posture.

B990A01O-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupantclassification system in the front passenger'sseat.The Occupant Classification system is de-signed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if thepassenger's front airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not. The driver's front airbag isnot affected or controlled by the OccupantClassification system.

B240C01O

If the front passenger seat is occupied by aperson, and the system determines to be ofadult size and he/she sits properly (sitting up-right with the seat back in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with their seat belton, legs comfortably extended and their feet on


40

- Lean on on the center console.- Sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

B990A07O

B990A05O

- Place feet on the dashboard.

o Excessively recline the front passengerseatback.

o Sit with hips shifted towards the front of theseat.

B990A03O

B990A02O

o Put a heavy load in the front passenger seat.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. When a larger child whohas outgrown a child restraint system sits inthe front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as an adult depending onhis/her physique or posture.

*3)Never install a child restraint system on thefront passenger seat.

In order that the system detects the condi-tions correctly, do not do any of the follow-ing.

B990A08O


41

When an adult is seated in the front passengerseat, if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is on, turn the ignition key to "LOCK" andask the passenger to sit properly (sitting uprightwith the seat back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and their feet on thefloor). Restart the engine and have the personin the position for about 30 seconds. This willallow the system to detect the person and toenable the passenger airbag. If the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, ask thepassenger to move to the rear seat.

B990A01O

Normal position

!

NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorilluminates for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" positionor after the engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is occupied, the occupantclassification sensor will then classify thefront passenger within approximately 10seconds after the ignition is turned on.

CAUTION:If the occupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warninglight on the instrument panel willilluminate because the passenger's frontairbags are connected with the occupantclassification system. If there is a malfunc-tion of the occupant classification system,the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorwill not illuminate and the passenger's frontairbags will inflate in frontal impact crasheseven if there is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warninglight does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, remainsilluminated after approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, or if it illuminates while the vehicleis being driven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classificationsystem and the SRS airbag system as soonas possible.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger's seat. A childrestraint system must never be placed inthe front seat. Children who are too largefor child restraint systems should al-ways occupy the rear seat and use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. Children areafforded the most safety in the event ofan accident when they are restrained bya proper restraint system in the rear seat.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by an adultand he/she sits properly (sitting uprightwith the seat back in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), have thatperson sit in the rear seat.

o If you change the weight on the frontpassenger seat, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator may be turned on oroff for a few seconds, disabling or en-abling the passenger airbags.


42

B990B04Y-AAT

Side Impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side impact collisions, dependingon the crash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact. The side impact airbags are not de-signed to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

! WARNING:o A smaller-stature adult who is not seated

correctly (for example: seat excessivelyreclined, leaning on the center console,hips shifted forward in the seat, or feetplaced on the dashboard) can cause acondition where the advanced frontal airbag system senses less weight than ifthe occupant were seated properly (sit-ting upright with the seat back in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet onthe floor). This condition can result in anadult potentially being misclassified andillumination of the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator.

! WARNING:o Do not modify or replace the front pas-

senger seat. Don't place anything on orattach anything to the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the occu-pant classification system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such as toolswhen occupying the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the occu-pant classification system.

o Do not use accessory seat covers on thefront seats.

o Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in the rearthan the front seat. It is recommendedthat child restraints be secured in a rearseat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.


43

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicle is inmotion. The side airbags deploy only incertain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury to thevehicle occupants.

!

B990B01O

Sideairbag sensor

!

B240C02O-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. If the SRS SRI (Service ReminderIndicator) does not illuminate, or continu-ously remains on, have your vehicle imme-diately inspected by your Hyundai dealer

o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel or front seats must beperformed by a qualified Hyundai technician.Improper handling of the airbag system mayresult in serious personal injury.

o To prevent unexpected deployment ofthe side impact air bag that may result inpersonal injury, avoid impact to the sideimpact airbag sensor when the ignitionkey is on.

WARNING:!o For the best protection from the side

impact airbag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side impactairbag, both front seat occupants shouldsit in an upright position with the seatbelt properly fastened. The driver'shands should be placed on the steeringwheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock posi-tions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-

vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the side of

the seat.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact airbaginflates.

WARNING:


44

!o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use

only a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injurydue to accidental deployment of theairbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

! WARNING:o If components of the airbag system must

be discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

o If you sell your vehicle, make certain thatthis manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your vehicle has been flooded and hassoaked carpeting or water on the floor,you shouldn't try to start the engine;have the car towed to an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o Do not replace the bumper or the bumperguard with the one other than the Hyundaigenuine parts. Otherwise, it can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto unexpected injury.

WARNING:

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orinfant or child could be severely injuredby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

!

B240C01HP


45

B240D01O-AAT

Additional Safety Precautionso Never let passengers ride in the cargo

area or on top of a folded-down backseat. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in acrash.

o Always sit upright with the seat back inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion with your seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and your feet onthe floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.


46 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A01O-AAT

B260A01O-A


47

1. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)2. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)3. Tachometer4. Turn Signal Indicator Lights5. Coolant Temperature Gauge6. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light7. Low Fuel Warning Light8. Fuel Gauge9. Speedometer10.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)11.Tail Gate Open Warning Light12.Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)13.Traction Control OFF Indicator Light (If installed)

14.Charging System Warning Light15.Door Ajar Warning Light16.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light17.Seat Belt Warning Light18.Low Oil Pressure Warning Light19.Odometer / Trip Odometer / Trip Computer (If installed)20.High Beam Indicator Light21.Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed)22.Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag)

Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)23.Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)24.Cruise SET Indicator Light (If installed)


48 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) ServiceReminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson for about 6 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position or after the engineis started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after coming on forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260E02O-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Chime

The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seatbelt is fastened when the ignition key is turnedfrom the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" andthe warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warn-ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, itshould come on when the ignition switchis turned on, then go out when the engineis started. If the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running, thereis a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it issafe to do so, turn off the engine and checkthe oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine off imme-diately. In any instance where the oil lightstays on when the engine is running, theengine should be checked by a Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!

B260F01A-AAT

Front Fog Indicator Light(If installed)

This front fog indicator light comes on wheneverthe front fog lamp switches are on.


49

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warning lightshould come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.

B260J02A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt. Do this as shownon page 6-19 by pushing down on the center ofthe belt. Have the system checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B260B01O-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the tail gate or tailgate window is completely closed and latched.


50

B260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light andChime

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only sounds wheneverthe key is in the ignition switch and thedriver's side front door is open simulta-neously. The chime sounds until the key isremoved from the ignition switch or thedriver's side front door is closed.

!

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System indicator will come onand then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake ForceDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B260C01O-GAT

Traction Control IndicatorLight (If installed)

The traction control indicator changes opera-tion according to the ignition switch position andwhether or not the system is in operation.It will also illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the TCS indicator stayson, take your car to your authorized Hyundaidealer and have the system checked. Seesection 2 for more information about the TCS.

B260N02A-AAT

Malfunction Indicator Light

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and then it will goout in a few seconds after the engine is started.If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminatewhen the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position,take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundaidealer and have the system checked.


51

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front and rear disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when new pads areneeded. The sound may come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicle is moving. Itmay also be heard when the brake pedal ispushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damagewill result if the worn pads are not replaced. Seeyour Hyundai dealer immediately.

B270B01O-AAT

PARKING START WARNING SOUND

If the vehicle driven at over 2mph(3km/h) more2~3 seconds, the warning chime will soundcontinuously when the parking brake engaged.

B260T01O-GAT

4WD System Warning Light(If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning lightwill come on and then go off in a few seconds.

B260Q03O-DAT

Cruise Indicator Light(If installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed on the steering wheel.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed again.Information about the use of cruise control isbeginning on page 1-89.

B265C01O-AAT

Traction Control IndicatorLights (3.5 L only) (If installed)

The traction control indicators change opera-tion according to the ignition switch position andwhether the system is in operation or not.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the TCS.

CAUTION:If the 4WD system warning light ( ) blinkswhile driving, this indicates that there is amalfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc-curs, have your vehicle checked by an au-thorized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible.

!

B260R01O-AAT

Cruise SET Indicator Light(If installed)

The cruise set indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the cruise control"SET (COAST)" switch is pushed on the steer-ing wheel.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control "SET (COAST)" switch is pushedagain or the cruise control "CANCEL" switch ispushed.

B900A01A-AAT

LIGHTS ON WARNING SOUND

The warning chime sounds when the tail lightsare on and the driver side door is open. Thisprevents the battery from discharging by warn-ing you when the car is left with the tail lights on.The chime sounds until the tail lights are turnedoff.


52

!

B290A03A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

The normal range is approximately in the middlebetween "H" and "C". If it moves across the dialto "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon aspossible and turn off the engine. Then open thehood and, after the engine has cooled, check thecoolant level and the water pump drive belt. If yoususpect cooling system trouble, have your cool-ing system checked by a Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

B290A01O

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacityis given in Section 9.

B280A01O

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER


53

B330A02A-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.

B330A01O

!

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-ters per hour (on the inner scale).

B300A01O-A

HSM2079

B310B01O-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER(Without Trip Computer)

Pushing in the trip switch for less than 1 secondwhen the ignition switch is turned "ON" displaysthe following sequence:


54

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distancein miles, and is useful for keeping a record formaintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have theodometer indicating less than 30 miles.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent to changethe number of the odometer. The alterationmay void your warranty coverage.

2, 3. Trip Odometer

Trip odometer records the distance of 2 trips inkilometers or miles.

TRIP A: Distance you have traveled from yourorigination point to a first destination.

TRIP B: Distance from the first destination to thefinal destination.

When the trip switch is pressed for more than1 second, trip odometer will reset to 0.

B310C01O-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER(With Trip Computer)

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distancein kilometers or miles, and is useful for keepinga record for maintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have theodometer indicating less than 30 miles.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent to changethe number of the odometer. The alterationmay void your warranty coverage.

B310B01O-E

B400B04O-E

Trip Odometer

Odometer


55

2. Trip Odometer

o This mode indicates the drive distance trav-elled since the last drive time reset.

o Refer to the explanation of the trip computer(see page 1-57, Tripmeter).

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01O-GAT

(If installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge that displaysinformation related to driving, such as a dis-tance to empty, average fuel consumption,average speed and tripmeter on the LCD.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

AVERAGE SPEED

TRIPMETER

HSM2079

Trip Computer Switch

o The trip computer switch is used to zero themulti-functional display mode.

o Pushing in the trip computer switch changesthe display as follows;


56

Distance to empty

Distance to empty symbol

B400B01O-A

Odometer

1. Distance to Empty

o This mode provides the estimated distanceto empty from the current fuel level in the fueltank.

o The trip computer may not register additionalfuel if less than 6.34 U.S. quarts (6 liters) offuel are added to the vehicle.

o When the battery has been reinstalled afterbeing discharged or disconnected, drivemore than 40 miles (64km) for an accuratedistance to empty.

NOTE:o If the distance to empty is less than 30

miles (50km),the symbol "RANGE" willblink and the distance to empty "----"digits come on until more fuel is added.

o The distance to empty can differ fromthe actual tripmeter according to drivingconditions.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-ing to the driving conditions, drivingpattern or vehicle speed.

B400B02O-A

Average fuel consumption symbol

2. Average Fuel Consumption

o This mode calculates the average fuel con-sumption from the total fuel used and thedistance since the last average consump-tion reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuelconsumption input.

o For an accurate calculation, drive more than0.03 mile (0.05 km) or 10 seconds.

o Average fuel consumption is reset to zero ifthe battery is disconnected.

o To reset the average fuel consumption tozero, press the trip computer switch formore than 1 second.

Average fuel consumption

Odometer


57MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

3. Average Speed

B400B04O-E

Tripmeter

B400B03O-A

Average speed

Average speed symbol

o This mode indicates the average speed fromthe starting of the vehicle to the ignition key"OFF". When the ignition key is "OFF", it willinitialize to 0 mph(0 km/h).

o Average speed is reset to zero if the batteryis disconnected.

o To reset the average speed to zero, pressthe trip computer switch for more than 1second.

4. Tripmeter

o This mode indicates the total distance trav-elled since the last tripmeter reset. Totaldistance is also reset to zero if the battery isdisconnected.

o Pressing the trip computer switch for morethan 1 second, when the tripmeter is beingdisplayed, clears the tripmeter to zero.

Odometer Odometer


58

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

B340C04A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.

B340B01O B340C01O

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The High BeamIndicator Light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340D01O

If necessary, to keep the lights on when theignition key is removed, perform the following:1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again

using the light switch.


59

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

B340E01O

B340G01LZ-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

HSM2094

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.

NOTE:Switch on car light manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

NOTE:o Never place anything over sensor lo-

cated on the instrument panel, this willensure better auto light system control.

o Don't clean the sensor using a windowcleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or othertypes of coating on the front windshield,the AUTO light system may not workproperly.

Auto light sensor

HSM2095


60

B350B02O-A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, push thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up-wards.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

B350A01O-A

(1)

(2)

(3)

B350B01O-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. Whenthe washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-matically make two passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to operate untilthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

B350B01O-A


61

B390A01JM-AAT

Rear Window Wiper And Washer(If installed)

1. : The rear window wiper starts to oper-ate three times after the washer fluidsprays onto the rear window.

2.OFF3.INT: The interval between wipes operates

every 5 seconds intermittently.4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to oper-

ate continuously.5. : The washer fluid will be sprayed onto

the rear window and the wiper oper-ates while the rear window wiper bar-rel is placed in this position.

B350D01O-A

B350C01O-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With theswitch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.It also can be varied by vehicle speeds withinsame time.

B350C01O-A

NOTE:Do not operate the washer continuously formore than 15 seconds or when the fluidreservoir is empty; this could damage thesystem. Do not operate the wiper when thewindow is dry; this can result in scratchingas well as premature wiper blade wear.


62

B360A01O-A

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMFRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

B370A01O-A

B360A04A-AAT

(If installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.They will light when the headlight switch is in thesecond position and the ignition key is in the"ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

B380A01HP-AAT

The rear window defroster switch also acti-vates the outside rear view mirror heaters.The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the switcha second time. The rear window defrosterautomatically turns itself off after about 20 min-utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

B380A01O-A

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH


63DIGITAL CLOCK

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

B400A01A-AAT

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.

B400A01O-A

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!

ELECTRIC AZIMUTH COMPASS

B990C02O-AAT

(With sunroof) (If installed)

It displays 8 azimuth according to the vehicle’sdriving direction and the angle of one graduationis 45°.The indication is displayed only when the ve-hicle is in motion.

Heading DisplayE : East, W: West,S : South, N : Northex) NW : North West

NOTE:If new vehicle is first driven or if the batteryhas been disconnected, correct the azi-muth indicator before driving.

B990C01O


64

Correcting Azimuth Indicator

The display before correction mode is set as"C". It is needed to correct the indicator betweena current azimuth to terrestrial magnetism sen-sor and the displayed azimuth in the vehicleposition.

How to correct azimuth indicator

1. If you push and hold the "M (MODE)" switchfor less than 4.5 seconds, the "C" will startblinking.

2. Slowly rotate the vehicle one turn(360 de-gree) within 128 seconds.The rotation could be made at anydirection(left or right) in an open space.

3. When the rotation is finished, the currentazimuth indicator will appear and the correc-tion mode is completed.If the indicator continues to blink, rotate thevehicle a bit more until the blinking stops.

NOTE:Rotate the vehicle one turn (90 degree) asshown in the drawing if the vehicle has noplace to rotate.After the correction mode is completed, thecompass heading will appear 3 secondslater.

The azimuth compass indicator correc-tion will be cancelled:

1. If you press "M (MODE)" switch for morethan 0.5 second.

2. When the vehicle is not rotated within 128seconds after the blinking of the indicator.

NOTE:The azimuth may display abnormally inspecific places (tunnel, parking lot in build-ing, underground parking lot, near trans-former substation, etc.). It is normal and theazimuth is displayed normally when escap-ing above mentioned places.

How to correct terrestrial deviation.

1. Press "M (MODE)" switch for more than 4.5seconds, then the present terrestrial devia-tion angle value will be displayed.

2. Press " (UP)" or " (DOWN)" switch forless than 0.5 second to correct the terrestrialdeviation angle within 30 seconds.

HSM2185

HSM2186


65

For the correct terrestrial deviation anglevalue for your location, refer to the contourline map included.If your place is located in between the terres-trial deviation contour line, you can apply anyvalue (up or down value) for your location inthe contour line map.The initial deviation angle is set to 5°W.Terrestrial Correction Range: West 30° ~East 30°.

3. To finish the correction, press "M (MODE)"switch for more than 1 second.

NOTE:The terrestrial deviation setting will be re-membered even if the battery has beendisconnected.

The terrestrial deviation angle correc-tion will be cancelled:

1. If you press "M (MODE)" switch for morethan 0.5 second.

2. If you don't correct the terrestrial deviationangle within 30 seconds.

The Counter Line Map for TerrestrialDeviation Angle Correction

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

B410A01O

B990C02O-A


66 POWER OUTLETS

B500D010O-AAT

The power outlets are located on the centerfacia panel and in the quarter trim.These supply 12V electric power to operateelectric accessories or equipment only whenthe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

! CAUTION:o Use when the engine is running and

remove a plug from the power outletafter using the electric appliance. Usingwhen the engine stops or remaining theelectric appliance with plugged in formany hours may cause the battery to bedischarged.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipment otherthan those designed to operate on 12volts.

o Some electronic devices can cause elec-tronic interference when plugged intothe power outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio noise and mal-functions in other electronic systems ordevices used in your vehicle.

HSM2158

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A01A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

HSM2157


67

B430A01O-AAT

Front Ashtray

The front ashtray may be opened by pulling it outby its grip. To clean ashtray, the plastic recep-tacle should be removed, by pressing the taband pulling out. The ashtray light will only illumi-nate when the external lights are on.

HSM2164

B440A01O-AAT

Rear Ashtray

The rear ashtray may be opened by pulling it outby its top edge.To clean ashtray, the plasticreceptacle should be removed, by pressing thetab and pulling out.

HSM2165

ASHTRAY DRINK HOLDER

!

B450A01JM-AAT

Front Drink Holder

The front drink holder is located on the mainconsole.

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure you or your passengers. Spilledliquids can damage interior trim andelectrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. The objects canbe thrown out in the event of a suddenstop or an accident, possibly injuringthe passengers in the vehicle.

B450A01O


68

!

B450B02O-AAT

Rear Drink Holder

The rear drink holder is located on the rear mainconsole and may be used for holding cups. Therear drink holder can be used by pushing andpulling it at its top edge.

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed positionwhen not in use.

B450B01O

!

! WARNING:Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. This objects can bethrown out in the event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.

B450B01JM-AAT

Rear Drink Holder

The rear drink holders is located in the rear seatarm rest. The rear drink holder can be used bypulling the rear seat armrest.

HSM2049

WARNING:Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. The objects can bethrown out in the event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.


69

!

!

SUNROOF

!

B460A01Y-AAT

(If installed)Sun Shade

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sun-shade which you can manually adjust to let inlight with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

B460A01O

B460B02O-GAT

Opening the Sunroof

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. Thesunroof is moved to its two-third open positionby pushing the " "switch, and to stop at thedesired position, push in any switches . To openthe sunroof fully open position, push and re-lease the " " switch again in the first position(two-third open position).To close, press and hold the " " button.Release the button when the sunroof reachesthe desired position.

NOTE:To reduce wind noise while driving, werecommend you to drive at the first openposition.

HSM2022

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, always keepthe head, hands and other parts of thebody of all occupants away from the roofopening. Otherwise, you could be seri-ously injured if the vehicle stops sud-denly or if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof control buttonlonger than necessary.Damage to the motor or system compo-nents could occur.


70

B460D01O-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

1. Open the sunglass case.

2. Turn the hexagonal bolts counterclockwiseto remove the overhead console with asocket wrench.

B460D01O

B460D02O

B460C01O-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof

The sunroof is moved to its fully tilt up positionby pushing the " " switch and to stop at thedesired position, push in any switches.To tilt down, press and hold the " " button.Release the button when the sunroof reachesthe desired position.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there is rain,be sure to wipe off any water that is on thesunroof before operating it.

HSM2023


71

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench providedwith the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle's glove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or coun-terclockwise to close.

B460D03O

INTERIOR LIGHT

B490A03Y-AAT

Interior Light

The interior courtesy light has three buttons.The three buttons are:

o DOORIn the " DOOR " position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.

B490A01O

B480B01JM-AAT

Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the light onor off. This light is convenient as a map light atnight or as a personal light for the driver and thepassenger.

HSM2112

With Sunroof Without Sunroof


72 GLOVE BOX

!

B500A01S-AAT

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

B500A01O

UNLOCK LOCK

o ONIn the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

! CAUTIONDo not leave this button pressed for anextended period of time when the vehicle isnot running.

o OFFIn the "OFF" position, the light stays off at alltimes even though a door is open. o To open the glove box, pull on the glove box

release lever.o The glove box door can be locked (and

unlocked) with the key.

SUNGLASS HOLDER

!

B491A03O-AAT

HSM2168

The sunglass holder is located on the frontoverhead console. Push the end of the cover toopen the sunglass holder.

WARNING:o Do not keep objects except sunglass

inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-jects can be thrown from the holder inthe event of a sudden stop or an acci-dent, possibly injuring the passengersin the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglass holder whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blocked byan open sunglass holder.

With Sunroof Without Sunroof


73

B500B01O-AAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automatically turn onthe light when the multi-function switch is turnedto the first/second position.

!

B505A01O-GAT

The center console box is used for storingcassette tape or small articles. To use thecenter console box, lift the cover (1) or open thecover with pressed the button (2).

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the centerconsole box lid should be kept closed whenthe car is in motion.

HSM2167

CENTER CONSOLE BOX

B510A01A-AAT

Manual Type

The outside rearview mirrors are equipped witha remote control for your convenience. It isoperated by the control lever in the bottom frontcorner of the window.Before driving away, always check that yourmirrors are positioned so you can see behindyou, both to the left and right sides, as well asdirectly behind your vehicle. When using themirror, always exercise caution when attempt-ing to judge the distance of vehicles behind oralong side of you.

B510A01O

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR


74

B510B02O

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust the mirror angle by depressing theappropriate directional switch as illustrated.

CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice, donot attempt to break it free using the controlhandle or by manipulating the face of themirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (notradiator antifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

!

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedto your preferred rear vision, both directly be-hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left andright sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both rightand left outside mirrors.

B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If installed)

B510B01O-A


75

B510D01HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER(If installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuatedin connection with the rear window defroster. Toheat the outside rearview mirror glass, push inthe switch for the rear window defroster. Therearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-ing or defogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions. Push theswitch again to turn the heater off. The outsiderearview mirror heater automatically turns itselfoff after 20 minutes.

B380A01O-A

!WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!

!

B510C02A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push themtoward the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.To unfold the outside rear view mirrors, pushthem toward the fornt.

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause serious injury ordeath.

B510C01O


76 HOMELINK MIRROR

Indicator Light

B520C01L-GAT

(If installed)

Your new vehicle may be equipped with anautomatic night vision mirror. During nighttimedriving, this feature will automatically detect andreduce dangerous rearview mirror glare.

Your new mirror also comes with an integratedHomeLink Universal Transceiver, which allowsyou to program up to 3 buttons on the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate, homelighting, etc. The mirror actually learns thecodes from your various existing transmitters.

B520C01L

Glare Detection

Homelink buttons

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEWMIRROR

B520A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderearview mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

B520A01O

B520B02O-GAT

Electric type (If installed)

The electric type day/night inside rearview mir-ror automatically controls the glare of headlightsof the car behind you.

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated bythe green status indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated bythe green status indicator LED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" position eachtime the vehicle is started.

HLZ2068-1


77

!

!

HOMELINK PROGRAMMING

CAUTION:o Make sure people and/or objects are out

of the way of any garage doors or gatesyou may be operating during the pro-gramming procedures.

o Keep original transmitters for potentialfuture programming needs, or in caseyou sell the vehicle.

o In the event you do sell your vehicle, it'srecommended you erase your pro-grammed HomeLink mirror buttons.

WARNING:Do not use HomeLink with any garage dooropener that lacks the safety stop and re-verse feature as required by federal safetystandards (includes garage doors manu-factured before April 1, 1982), as thesedoors can increase the risk of serious injuryor death. Call 1-800-355-3515 or visitwww.homelink.com for more information.

Automatic-Dimming Function

To assist you during nighttime driving, yourmirror will automatically dim upon detectingglare from the vehicles behind you.

Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function off. The mirror indicator lightwill turn off.

Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "on" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

B520C01L

Automatic-dimming mirrorfunction buttons

NOTE:If programming a garage door opener orgate, it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the "cycling" process to preventpossible motor burnout.

Programming

Ensure the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC"position to program and/or operate HomeLinksystem. It is also recommended that a newbattery be placed in the handheld transmitter ofthe device being programmed to HomeLink forquicker programming and accurate transmis-sion of the radio-frequency.Follow these steps to program your HomeLinkmirror:

B520C02L

Flashing


78

Operating HomeLink

Simply press the appropriate HomeLink buttonto activate the trained product (garage door,security system, entry door lock, estate gate,lighting, etc.). The original handheld transmit-ters may also be used at any time.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press andrelease the programmed HomeLink button.Press and release the same HomeLink but-ton a second time to complete the program-ming process. (Some devices may requireyou to press and release a third time tocomplete the programming.)

4. Now HomeLink mirror and rolling-code-equipped device should be synchronized.The remaining HomeLink buttons may nowbe programmed if this has not been donepreviously.

1. When programming the buttons for the firsttime, press and hold the two outsideHomeLink buttons ( , ), releasing whenthe indicator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). This procedure erasesthe factory-set default codes. Do not per-form this step when programming additionaltransmitters.

Flashing

2. Hold the transmitter of the device you wantto program 1 to 3 inches away from thebottom of the mirror. Simultaneously pressthe handheld transmitter button and theHomeLink button you wish to program. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first, thenrapidly, indicating successful programming.

B520C03L

Transmitter

1 ~

3 inc

hes

Additional Programming for Rolling CodeDevices

For any rolling-code-equipped device; followthe steps additional below after completing the"Programming" section. A second person maymake the following steps easier.

1. Locate the "learn" or "smart" button on thedevice's motor head unit. The exact locationand color of the button varies by productbrand, but is usually referenced in the device'sowner's manual. Contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or www.homelink.com forhelp.

2. Press and release the "learn" or "smart"button on the device's motor head unit.

NOTE:You now have 30 seconds to initiate step 3.

3. If the garage door opener or other device youwish to program is rolling-code equipped,proceed to the "Rolling Code Programming"section.

4. Repeat step 2 to program the remainingHomeLink buttons.


79

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButton

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, follow thesesteps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-ton. Do not release until step 4 has beencompleted.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly(after 20 seconds), hold the handheld trans-mitter 1 to 3 inches away from the bottom ofthe mirror.

3. Press and hold the transmitter button (or, ifnecessary, press and "cycle," as describedin the '"Gate Operator & Canadian Program-ming" portion of this text).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly, indicating successfulprogramming. Release both buttons.

Erasing Programmed Buttons

To erase the three HomeLink buttons, pressand hold the two outside buttons until the indica-tor light begins to flash (after 20 seconds).Release both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but can bereprogrammed.

B520C02L

Flashing

Gate Operator Programming & Cana-dian Programming

During programming, your handheld transmit-ter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press and hold the HomeLink buttonwhile you press and repress ("cycle") yourhandheld transmitter every two seconds untilthe frequency signal has been learned. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly upon successful programming.

Accessories

For more information on HomeLink andHomeLink-compatible products, or to purchaseHomeLink accessories, call 1-800-355-3515or visit www.homeink.com.


80 PARKING BRAKE

B530A01A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the vehicle. This also turns on the parkingbrake indicator light when the key is in the "ON"or "START" position. Before driving away, besure that the parking brake is fully released andthe indicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.

o To release the parking brake, pull up andpress the thumb button. Then, while holdingthe button in, lower the brake lever.

B530A01O

TAIL GATE

B540A01FC-AAT

B540A01O

o The tail gate can be locked or unlocked witha key.

o To open the tail gate, you need to unlock,press the lever of the outside handle, andthen raise it.

o To close, lower the tail gate, then press downon it until it is closed. To be sure the tail gateis fully closed, try to pull it up again withoutusing the outside handle.

! WARNING:The tail gate should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaustgases may enter the car resulting in seriousillness or death to the occupants. See addi-tional warnings concerning exhaust gaseson page 2-2.


81

B540B02O-AAT

Tail gate Window

HSM2012

o When you push the tail gate window releasebutton to open the tail gate window, it willspring up slightly.Raise the tail gate window. The window willraise completly by itself after it has beenraised halfway.

o To close the tail gate window, lower the tailgate window, and it will close by itself.To be sure the tail gate window is securelyfastened, try to pull it up again.

NOTE:The tail gate window lock is operated is inconnection with the tail gate lock. To openthe tail gate window make sure the tail gateis unlocked with a key or the central doorlocking switch.

B540C01HP-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

Luggage compartment light has a 3-positionswitch. The three positions are:

o In the "MIDDLE" position, the luggage com-partment light comes on when the tail gate isopened, then goes out when it is closed.

o In the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

o In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at alltimes.

HSM2113

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

B640A01S-AAT

CARGO SECURITY SCREEN(If installed)

B640A01O

To use the security screen, pull it out of theretractor and hook it to the anchors as illus-trated.


82

! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-partment.

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. Theluggage net ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of its recoil path. DO NOT usewhen the luggage net straps have visiblesigns of wear or damage.

B540D02O-AAT

LUGGAGE NET (If installed)

When loading the objects in the luggage com-partment, use the four rings located in theluggage compartment to attach the luggage netas shown illustration. This will help prevent theobjects from sliding.

HSM233

B650A01S-AAT

Stowage Precautions

1. Do not place objects on the cargo securityscreen. Such objects may be thrown aboutinside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicleoccupants during an accident or when brak-ing.

2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnec-essary weight.

3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggagecompartment. It is designed for luggageonly.

4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle andlocate the weight as far forward as possible.

!


83ROOF RACK

B630A02O-AAT

(If installed)

If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails andfixing components to adapt the roof rack on yourvehicle may be obtained from an authorizedHyundai dealer.

HSM2173

CAUTION:o The following specifications are recom-

mended when loading cargo or luggage.

75 lbs (34 kg) EvenlyDistributed

o Loading cargo or luggage above 75 lbs(34 kg) on the roof rack may damage yourvehicle.When you carry large objects, never letthem hang over the rear or the sides ofyour vehicle.

o To prevent damage or loss of cargo asyou are driving, check frequently to makesure the luggage carrier and cargo arestill securely fastened.

o Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

o To use the roof rails as a roof rack, youmust fit the roof rails with two or morecrossrails or equivalent before carryingcargo or luggage on the roof.

o Loading cargo or luggage exceeding thespecification on the roof rack may re-duce the stability of your vehicle.

o In case a sunroof is installed, do notposition roof rack loads that could inter-fere with opening of the sunroof.

ROOF RACK

!

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01A-AAT

(If installed)

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window alsolights when the brakes are applied.

B550A01O


84

! WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

B560A02O-1

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASEAUTO FUEL CUT SWITCH

!

B560B01O-AAT

The auto fuel cut switch is located on the driver'sside of the engine compartment.In the event of a collision or sudden impact, theauto fuel cut device cuts off the fuel supply. If thisdevice is activated, it must be reset by pressingin on the top of the switch before the engine canbe restarted.

WARNING:Before resetting the auto fuel cut switch,the fuel line should be checked for fuelleaks.

B560B01O

B560A02JM-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid openerlocated on the front floor area on the left side ofthe vehicle.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved de-icer fluid (donot use radiator anti-freeze) or move thevehicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

B560A01O


85HOOD RELEASE

B570A01L-GAT

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood.

WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the check engine" " indicator illuminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.- Before touching the fuel nozzle or

fuel filler cap, have one's hands incontact with metal parts away fromthe filler neck to discharge static elec-tricity.

- Do not get back in the vehicle whilerefueling. Do not operate anythingthat can produce static electricity.Static electricity discharge can ignitefuel vapors resulting in explosion.

B570A01O

B570A02O

! ! WARNING:- When using a portable fuel container

be sure to place the container on theground while refueling. Static elec-tricity discharge from the containercan ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.While starting refueling contactshould be maintained until the fillingis complete.

- Do not use cellular phones around agas station. The electric current orelectronic interference from cellularphones can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire.

- When refueling always shut the en-gine off. Sparks by electrical equip-ment of the engine can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. After refueling,check to make sure the fuel filler capis securely closed, and then start theengine.

- Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotivefuels are flammable.


86 SUN VISORFLOOR MAT ANCHOR

B580A01O-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.A ticket holder is provided on the front of thesunvisor for the driver. Vanity mirrors are pro-vided on the back of the sun visor for the driverand front passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound in the front of each sun visor.

B580A01O

Vanity mirror

!

B571A03Y-AAT

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it may cause anaccident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the anchored floor mat, otherwisethe additional mat may slide forward andinterfere with the movement of the ped-als.

! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.

2. Push the secondary latch lever up and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

B570A03O

When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.

B570A01JM-A

Ticket holder


87STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

!

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever upward and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.

B580B01O-AAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If installed)

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automati-cally turn on the mirror light when the multi-function switch is turned to the first/secondposition.

B600A02Y-AAT

B600A01O

! WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

B580C01O

B580C01JM-AAT

SUN VISOR EXTENDER

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extend-ers that may be used when the visor is in the sideglass position.


88 REAR SEAT ARM RESTHORN

B611A01Y-AAT

This arm rest is located in the center of the rearseat back.

HSM2049

B610A01L-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

B610A01O

FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is to assistwhen you get in or out and also to warn passingvehicles.

B620A01O


89

B660B04O-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate. This turns thesystem on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above25 mph (40 km/h).

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A02S-AAT

(If installed)The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onstraight, open freeways, toll roads, or othernoncongested highways. This system is de-signed to function above approximately 25 mph(40 km/h).

NOTE:Cruise control is not recommended for citydriving, winding roads, slippery roads,heavy rain, or other bad weather condi-tions.

B660A01O

3. Push the "SET" (COAST) switch after youhave set the vehicle speed at the desiredspeed. The "SET" indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

B660B01O

5. To momently increase speed, temporarilydepress the accelerator pedal enough forthe vehicle to exceed the preset speed.When you remove your foot from the accel-erator pedal, the vehicle will return to thespeed you have set.

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases more than 12mph (20 km/h) below the set speed ordecreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), thecruise control system will automaticallycancel the set speed.


90

B660F04O-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the "SET (COAST)" switch and hold it.While the control switch is pushed, the "SET"indicator light in the instrument cluster willilluminate and the vehicle speed will gradu-ally decrease.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control switch.The "SET" indicator light in the instrumentcluster will go out.

B660B01O

B660D01O-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push the"RESUME (ACCEL)" switch, providing the ve-hicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660E01Y-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the "RESUME (ACCEL)" switch andhold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the"RESUME (ACCEL)" switch. While the con-trol switch is held, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.

B660D01O

B660C03O-AAT

To cancel the cruise speed

To disengage the cruise control system, pushthe "CANCEL" switch.Additionally, the following actions will disengagethe system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Shift the selector lever to "N" position.o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the

memory speed by 12 mph (20 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).o Release the cruise control ON/OFF switch.

B660C01O


91

! WARNING:o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off when not using the cruise control.o Use the cruise control system only when

traveling on open highways in goodweather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET" switch is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize after ap-proximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.


92

B710B02O-AAT

Center Ventilator

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the instrument panel. To change the directionof the air flow, move the knob in the center of thevent up-and-down and side-to-side. The ventsare opened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

B710C02O-AAT

Side Ventilator

The side ventilators are located on each side ofthe front door. To change the direction of the airflow, move the knob in the center of the vent up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01O-A

B710A01O-GAT

(If installed)

1. Side Ventilator2. Side Defroster Nozzle3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator


93HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670C03O-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button is illuminated when the air intakecontrol is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

B670B02O-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

This is used to select the blower fan speed.The blower fan speed, and therefore the volumeof air delivered from the system, may be con-trolled manually by setting the blower controlbetween the "1" and "4" position.1 being the lowest fan speed and 4 being thehighest fan speed.

B670B01O-1 B670C02O

B670A03O-AAT

(If installed)

There are three controls and two switches forthe heating and cooling system. They are:

1. Air intake control switch2. Air conditioning switch3. Air flow control4. Fan speed control5. Temperature control

B690A01O-1

1 2

3 4 5


94

With the " " mode selected, air enters thevehicle from outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the other functions selected.With the " " mode selected, air from withinthe passenger compartment is drawn throughthe heating system and heated or cooled ac-cording to the other functions selected.

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to fogging of the windshieldand side windows and the air within thepassenger compartment will become stale.In addition prolonged use of the air condi-tioning with the " " mode selected mayresult in the air within the passenger com-partment becoming excessively dry.

B670D04O-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and todirect the flow of air. Air can be directed to thefloor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Fivesymbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used toturn the blower fan off.

B670D01O-1 Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the face level vents.

HSM2122


95

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to havecooler air from the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the same time.

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, the floor vents, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

HSM2124 HSM2125HSM2123


96

HSM428

* The A/C or the air intake control switchreturns to its memorized setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

OFF

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

OFF

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turnon automatically and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to improve windshield defrosting.

NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.If the air flow control is set to the floor-defrost or the defrost mode, the A/C willturn on automatically but the A/C indicator

light does not turn on. The A/C will not offuntil the air flow control is set to the anothermode except the floor-defrost mode andthe defrost mode.

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will change

to " " mode when the ignition switchis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C modeselected.

o When you change to another mode fromMAX A/C, the A/C and the air intakecontrol switch are set to the followingchart.

HSM2126


97HEATING CONTROLS

B690A01O-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air flowcontrol to the floor ( ) position. (The "Fresh"mode will be activated.)

For faster heating, the air intake control switchshould be set in the recirculate ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flow control tothe defrost ( ) position (The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-vated.)

For maximum heat, move the temperature con-trol to "Warm".

B690A01O-1

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

B670E01O

Cool WarmB670D07O

OFF-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

NOTE:If the air flow control is off, the air intakecontrol is set to the fresh mode automati-cally.


98 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMVENTILATIONBI-LEVEL HEATING

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to the face ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B710A01A-AATB700A02A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. This makes it possible to have coolerair from the dashboard vents and warmer airfrom the floor outlets at the same time. To usethis feature:


o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B700A01O-1 B710A01O-1

B740A01S-AAT

(If installed)Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

B740A01O


99

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the recirculate ( ) position on theair intake control switch.

B740C02O-AAT

De-Humidified Heating

For dehumidified heating:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.


o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

B740C01O-1

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.


B740B03O-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCooling

B740B01O-1


100

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-tem, temporarily set the air intake controlswitch to the position.Be sure to return the control switch tothe position when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. Thiswill help keep the driver alert and comfort-able.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control switch to the fresh air( ) position, fan speed to the desiredposition, turn on the air conditioning system,and adjust temperature control to desiredtemperature.


101

B720A02E-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to formon the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed controlto the low position.

B720A02O-1 B720B02O-1

Manual A/C Full automatic A/C Manual A/C Full automatic A/C


102 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlledby simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B01O-AAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control Button 2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch 3. Display Window 4. Air Flow Control Switch 5. Blower Fan Speed Control Switch

6. OFF Switch 7. Air Conditioning Switch 8. Air Intake Control Switch 9. Defroster Switch10. Ambient Temperature Switch

B970B01O


103

B970C01O-AAT

Automatic OperationNOTE:o If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode willreset to Fahrenheit degree.This is a normal condition and you canadjust the temperature mode from Fahr-enheit to Centigrade as follows;Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3seconds or more with the AMB buttonheld down.The display shows that the unit of tem-perature is adjusted to Fahrenheit orCentigrade(°F →→→→→ °C or °C →→→→→ °F).

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls the heatingand cooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator lightwill come on confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and, the air conditioning will operate ifambient temperature is higher than 32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if the ambi-ent temperature drops below 32°F(0°C).

o Never place things on the sensor whichis located in the car on the instrumentpanel to ensure better control of theheating and cooling system.

B970C01O

HSM502

Photo sensor

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum "HI" by pushing on the button. Eachpush of the button will cause the temperatureto increase by 1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum "LO" by pushing on the button. Eachpush of the button will cause the temperatureto decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

B970C03O


104

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns offthe fan.

B670C03S-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on thebutton goes off when the air intake control is infresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

B670C01OB980B01O

B995A01O-GAT

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH

Pressing the "AMB" button displays the ambienttemperature on display window.

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well as by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. At this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B995A01O


105

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in "recirculation"mode will give rise to fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the air withinthe passenger compartment will becomestale. In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the "Recirculation" modeselected may result in the air within thepassenger compartment becoming exces-sively dry.

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System OffB980E01O-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost posi-tion.

HSM218

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

B980D01O


106

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indicatorlight will come on and the air will be dischargedthrough the floor vents, windshield defrosternozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventila-tor.

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator lightwill come on and the air will be dischargedthrough the face vents and the floor vents. Thismakes it possible to have cooler air from thedashboard vents and warmer air from the flooroutlets at the same time.

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face-Level", the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.

HSM2123 HSM2124HSM2122


107

B980F02O-AAT

Defrost Switch

B980F01O

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the "Fresh"mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning willoperate if ambient temperature is higher than32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if theambient temperature drops below 32°F(0°C).

B740D01Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you firstget in, open the windows for a few minutesto expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed to keep hotair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shiftto a lower gear. This increases engine speed,which in turn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning offto avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.

o During winter months or in periods when theair conditioning is not used regularly, run theair conditioning once every month for a fewminutes. This will help circulate the lubri-cants and keep your system in peak oper-ating condition.

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost Level", theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrosternozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.

HSM2125


108

! CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions such as dusty, rough roads, morefrequent climate control air filter inspec-tions and changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is suddenly de-creased, the system should be checkedat an authorized dealer.

B760A01Y

B760A06A-GAT

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWERUNIT) (If installed)

The climate control air filter is located in front ofthe evaporator unit behind the glove box.It operates to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.To replace the climate control air filter, refer tothe page 6-17.

Inside air

Blower

Evaporator core

Filter

Outside air

Inside ofa vehicle

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER


109STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

Ionosphere

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges


110

!

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

B750B03Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

B750A04L B750A05L


111AUDIO SYSTEM

H260A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

H260A01O2. FADER Control Knob

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Selector

7. PRESET Button


112

H260B04O-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD showsthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the CDtrack indicator in the CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

BALANCE Control

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize right speaker sound (left speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speaker soundwill be attenuated).

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned clockwise, rear speaker soundwill be emphasized (front speaker sound will beattenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out.Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

4. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll.Release button once the desired station isreached.

SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec ormore. Releasing it will automatically tune to thenext available station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) side ispressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1and FM2 bands. The mode selected is dis-played on LCD.

7. PRESET STATION SELECT Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit on this unit.

FM/AM


113

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory.You should then release the button, andproceed to program the next desired station.A total of 18 stations can be programmed byselecting one AM and two FM stations perbutton.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

!


114

H260B01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

1. Playing CD

H260A01O

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. SCAN Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. EJECT Button


115

B260D04O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beg-inning of the next track. Press once toskip back to the beginning of the track.

4. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed with aCD loaded, the CD will eject.

NOTE:o If the CD does not operate properly or if

the ER2 fault code is displayed, use oneof two methods to reset the CD deckfunction.- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.

Then, reinstall the audio fuse.- Diconnect the negative terminal of the

battery and wait 5 minutes. Then re-connect the negative battery terminal.

o To assure proper operation of the unit,keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.


116

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,genuine CDs are recommended.


117

B890A02O-AAT

AUDIO FAULT CODE

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system CD mode, find the cause in the chart below.If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Then insert a normal CD disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR


118

D285A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)

6. AUDIO Knob(Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade)

1. POWER ON•OFF,VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. RADIO STATIONControl Knob

4. SEEK/SCAN Button

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

HSM324

5. PRESET STATIONSelect Button


119

D285B02O-AAT

1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob

Press this knob to turn the system on and off.

VOLUME Control

Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.


Press this button to switch between AM, FM1and FM2. The display will show your selection.

3. RADIO STATION Control Knob

Turn this knob to tune to radio stations.

4. SEEK/SCAN Button SEEK

Press the up or down arrow to seek to the nextor previous station and stay there. The soundwill mute while seeking.

SCAN

Press and hold one of the arrows for more thantwo seconds. The radio will produce one beep.The radio will produce one beep. The radio willscan to each stations, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next station. Press one of thearrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stopscanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever thetuner is in the scan mode. In FM mode, thisfunction will scan through the current band suchas FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan stations witha strong signal only. The sound will mute whilescanning.

5. PRESET STATION Select Button

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND select button to select AM, FM1

of FM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and

treble equalization that best suits the type ofstation you are listening to.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons. The radio will produce onebeep. Whenever you press that numberedpushbutton, the station you set will returnand the bass and treble equalization that youselected will also be automatically selectedfor that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the above steps for each pushbutton.

6. AUDIO KnobSetting the Tone (BASS/Treble)

Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease. The display will show the bass ortreble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you maywant to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass and treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio willproduce one beep and adjust the display levelto the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.The radio will produce one beep and displayCENTERED.


120

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

To adjust the balance between the right and leftspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knobuntil BAL appears on the display. Turn the knobclockwise to move the sound to the right speak-ers and counterclockwise to move the sound tothe left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers push and release the AUDIO knobuntil FADE appears on the display. Turn theknob clockwise to move the sound to the frontspeakers and counterclockwise to move thesound to the rear speakers.

The middle position balances the sound be-tween the speakers. To adjust the balance andfade to the middle position, push the AUDIOknob then push it again and hold it until you hearone beep. The balance and fade will be adjustedto the middle position and the display will showthe speaker balance.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is display ALLwith the level display in the middle position.

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

This feature allows you to choose bass andtreble equalization settings designed for coun-try jazz, news, pop, rock and classical stations.

Each time you press the AUTO TONE button,this feature will change to one of the presetequalization settings previously listed.

To return the bass and treble to the custommode, push and release the AUDIO knob untilcustom is displayed.

8. Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage form loud noise is almostundetectable until it is too late. Your hearing canadapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound thatseems normal can be loud and harmful to yourhearing. Take precautions by adjusting thevolume control on your radio to a safe soundlevel before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the volume knob to the lowest setting.2. Increase volume slowly until you hear com-

fortably and clearly.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the



!


121

D285C01O-AAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)


1. SEEK Button

7. TAPE/CD Select Button

HSM324

2. REVERSE Button3. FORWARD Button

5. DOLBY Button 4. SIDE Button

8. TAPE EJECT Button


122

D285D02O-AAT

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapesthat are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.Tapes longer than that are so thin they may notwork well in this player. The longer side with thetape visible should face to the right. If the ignitionis on, but the radio is off, the tape can be insertedand will begin playing. A tape symbol is shownon the display whenever a tape is inserted. If youhear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape maynot be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove thetape and start over.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIOand SEEK controls just as you do for the radio.The display will show TAPE and an arrowshowing which side of the tape is playing. Youcan insert a tape when the ignition is off.If an error appears on the display, see "Cas-sette Tape Message" later in this section.

1. SEEK ButtonSEEK

Press this pushbutton to go to the next selectionon the tape if you press pushbutton more thanonce, the player will continue moving forwardthrough the tape. SEEK and a positive numberwill appear on the display. Your tape must haveat least three seconds of silence between eachselection for next to work. The sound still mutewhile seeking.

SEEK

Press this pushbutton to go to the previousselection on the tape if the selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If thispushbutton is pressed and the current selectionhad been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the previous selectionor the beginning of the current selection, de-pending upon the position on the tape. SEEK anda negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previousmode. If this pushbutton is pressed additionaltimes or held, the radio will go to the displayednumber of previous selections up to 9. SEEKand a negative number will appear on the dis-play. Your tape must have at least three sec-onds of silence between each selection forprevious to work. The sound will mute whileseeking.

2. REVERSE Button

Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rap-idly. Press it again to return to playing speed.The radio will play the last selected station whilethe tape reverses. The station frequency andREV will appear on the display. You may selectstations during reverse operation by usingTUNE, SEEK or PRESET SCAN.

3. FORWARD Button

Press this pushbutton to advance quickly toanother part of the tape. Press this pushbuttonagain to return to playing speed. The radio willplay the last selected station while the tapeadvances. The station frequency and FWD willappear on the display. You may select stationsduring forward operation by using TUNE, SEEKor PRESET SCAN.

4. SIDE Button

Press this pushbutton to play the other side ofthe tape.

5. (DOLBY)

Press this pushbutton to reduce backgroundnoise. DOLBY B ON will appear on the display.Press it again to turn Dolby B off. DOLBY B OFFwill appear on the display. Dolby Noise Reduc-tion is manufactured under a license form DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby andthe double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolbylaboratories Licensing Corporation.


Press this button to listen to the radio when atape is playing. The tape will stop but remain inthe player.


123


Press this button to play a tape when listeningto the radio. Press TAPE/CD to switch betweenthe tape and compact disc if both are loaded.The inactive tape or CD will remain safe insidethe radio for future listening.

8. Cassette Tape EJECT Button

Press this button, located to the right of thecassette tape slot to eject a tape. The tape isejected with the radio off. Cassette tape may beloaded with the radio off.

9. Cassette Tape MessagesCHECK TAPE

If this message appears on the radio display, thetape won't play because of one of the followingerrors.o The tape is tight and the player can't turn the

tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tapewith the open end down and try to turn theright hub counterclockwise with a pencil.Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs donot turn easily, your tape may be damagedand should not be used in the player. Try anew tape to make sure your player is work-ing properly.

o The tape is broken. Try a new tape.o The tape is wrapped around the tape head.

Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a newtape.

CLEAN

If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but you should clean it as soonas possible to prevent damage to the tapes andplayer. See "Care of Your Cassette Tape Player"in the Index.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can'tbe corrected, contact your dealer.

10. Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly cancause reduced sound quality, reined cassettesor a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their case away from con-taminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. Ifthey aren't they may not operate properly ormay cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularlyafter every 59 hours of use. Your radio maydisplay CLEAN to indicate that you have usedyour tape player needs to be cleaned. It will stillplay tapes, but you should clean it as soon aspossible to prevent damage to your tapes andplayer. If you notice a reduction in sound quality,try a known good cassette to see of it is the tapeor the tape player or fault. If this other cassettehas no improvement in sound quality, clean thetape player.

The recommended cleaning method for yourcassette tape player is the use of a scrubbingaction, non-abrasive cleaning cassette withpads which scrub the tape head as the hubs ofthe cleaner cassette turn. The recommendedcleaning cassette is available through yourdealer.

When cleaning the cassette tape player with therecommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette,it is possible that the cassette may eject, be-cause the cut tape detection feature on yourradio may recognize it as a broken tape. Toprevent the cleaning cassette from beingejected, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.2. Turn the radio off.


124

3. Press and hold the TAPE/CD select buttonfor five seconds. READY will appear on thedisplay and a cassette symbol will flash forfive second.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cas-sette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after themanufacturer's recommended cleaningtime.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected,the broken tape detection feature is activeagain.You may also choose a non-scrubbing action,wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with afabrica belt to clean the tape head. This type ofcleaning cassette will not eject on its own. Anon-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean asthoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Theuse of a non-scrubbing action, dry-tape clean-ing cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold theEJECT button for five seconds to reset theCLEAN indicator. The radio will displayCLEANED to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the soundquality may degrade over time. Always makesure the cassette tape is in good conditionbefore you have your tape player serviced.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.




125

D285E01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)

7. CD EJECT Button


1. SEEK/SCAN Button


HSM324

2. REVERSE Button

3. FORWARD Button

4. RANDOM Button


126

D285F02O-AAT

Playing a Compact Disc

Insert a disc partway into the slot. Label side up.The player will pull it in and the disc should beginplaying. The display will show the CD symbol.You can inset a compact disc with the ignition off.

NOTE:This CD player is suitable only for 12 cmdiscs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

1. SEEK/SCAN ButtonSEEK

Press this Pushbutton to go to the next TRACKand the track number will appear on the display.If you hold this pushbutton or press it more thanonce, the player will continue moving forwardthrough the disc. The sound will mute whileseeking.

SEEK

Press this Pushbutton to go to the previoustrack if the current track has been playing forless than eight seconds. If this pushbutton ispressed and the current track has been playingfor more than eight seconds, it will go to thebeginning of the current track. TRACK and thetrack number will appear on the display. If youhold this pushbutton or press it more than once,the player will continue moving back through thedisc. The sound will mute while seeking.

SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. Use SEEKSCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds.The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN willappear on the display. Press either SEEK SCANarrow again to stop scanning.

2. REVERSE Button

Press and hold this pushbutton to reversequickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to re-verse at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two seconds toreverse at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release it to play the passage. The display willshow ET and the elapsed time.

3. FORWARD Button

Press and hold this pushbutton to advancequickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to ad-vance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two seconds toadvance at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release it to play the passage. The display willshow ET and the elapsed time.

4. RANDOM Button

Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order. RDM willappear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when eachtrack starts to play. Press it again to turn offrandom play. RDM OFF will appear on thedisplay.


Press this button to listen to the radio when adisc is playing. The disc will stop but remain inthe player.


Press this button to play a CD when listening tothe radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between thetape and compact disc if both are loaded. Theinactive tape or CD will remain safely inside theradio for future listening.

7. CD EJECT Button

Press this button, located to the left of the CD slotto eject a CD. Eject may be activated with eitherthe ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded withthe radio and ignition off.


127

8. Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle disc careful. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If the surface of a discis soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution and clean it, wipingfrom the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writingwhen handling discs. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of the hole and theouter edge.

9. Care of Your Compact Disc Player

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal to the CDmechanism.

10. CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapterkit with your cassette tape player after disablingthe tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tapeplayer.

To disable the feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the radio off.2. Press and hold the TAPE CD Button. The

radio will display READY and flash the cas-sette icon.

3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It willpower up the radio and begin playing

This override routine will remain active untilEJECT button is pressed.

NOTE:Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle--like a tape player, CB radio,mobile telephone or two-way radio--be sureyou can add what you want. If you can, it'svery important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle's engine, DelphiElectronics radio or other systems, andeven damage them. Your vehicle's systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added improp-erly. So, before adding sound equipment,check with your dealer and be sure to checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units.










128

D295A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-295) (If installed)


4. SEEK/SCAN Button

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

HSM325

1. POWER ON•OFF,VOLUME Control Knob

3. RADIO STATIONControl Knob

6. AUDIO Knob(BASS/MID/TREB)



129

D295B02O-AAT

1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob

Press this knob to turn the system on and off.

VOLUME Control

To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.


Press this button to switch between AM, FM1and FM2. Then Display shows your selection.

3. RADIO STATION Control Knob

Turn this knob to select radio stations.

4. SEEK/SCAN ButtonSEEK

Press the up or down arrow to go to the nexthigher or lower station and stay there. Thesound will mute while seeking.

SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the displayand you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen tostations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go to thenext station. Press either SEEK/SCAN arrowagain to stop scanning. If you press SEEK/SCAN for more than four seconds, the radio willchange to preset scan mode. Then sound willmute while scanning.


The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.2. Press AM · FM to select the band.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization

that best suited type of station selected.5. Press and hold one of the six numbered

buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered button, the station youset will return and the equalization that youselected will also be automatically selectedfor that button.

6. Repeat the above steps for each pushbutton.

PRESET SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrow formore than four seconds, PRESET SCAN willappear on the display. You will hear a doublebeep. Use PERSET SCAN to listen to each ofyour preset stations for a few seconds. Theradio will go to a preset station stored on yourpushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go onto the next preset stations. Press either SEEK/SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.

6. AUDIO KnobBASS

Press the AUDIO knob until BASS appears onthe display. Turn the knob to increase or de-crease bass. When you use this control, theradio's tone setting will switch to custom mode.To set the bass to the middle position, selectBASS and press and hold the AUDIO knob. Theradio will produce one beep and set the displaylevel to zero. To set all tone and speakercontrols to the middle position, press and holdthe AUDIO knob when no tone or speakercontrol is active. The radio will produce onebeep and CENTERED will appear on the dis-play.


130

MID

Press the AUDIO knob until MID appears on thedisplay. Turn the knob to increase or decreasemid. When you use this control, the radio's tonesetting will switch to custom mode.

To set the mid to the middle position, select MIDand press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radiowill produce one beep and set the display levelto zero. To set all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press and hold the AUDIOknob when no tone or speaker control is active.Then radio will produce one beep and CEN-TERED will appear on the display.

TREB

Press the AUDIO knob until TREB appears onthe display. Turn the knob to increase to de-crease treble. When you use this control, theradio's tone setting will switch to custom mode.If a station is weak or noisy, you may want todecrease the treble.

To set treble to the middle position, select TREBand press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radiowill produce one beep and set the display levelto zero. To set all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press and hold the AUDIOknob when no tone or speaker control is active.The radio will produce one beep and CEN-TERED will appear on the display.

7. AUTO EQUALIZER Button

This feature allows you to choose preset bass,mid and treble equalization settings designedfor country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classicalstations. The last setting will appear on thedisplay when you first press AUTO EQ. Eachtime you press AUTO EQ, another setting willappear on the display. Press AUTO EQ againcountry disappear and CUSTOM will appear.Tone control will return to the BASS, MID andTREB. Also, if you alter BASS, MID, or TREBwhile in an auto EQ setting, the radio will returnto CUSTOM. CUSTOM will appear on the dis-play.

8. Adjusting the SpeakersBAL-FADE

The AUDIO knob adjusts balance and fade. Toadjust balance, press the AUDIO knob until BALappears on the display. Turn the knob to adjustthe sound to the left or right speakers. Themiddle position balances the sound between thespeakers. To adjust fade, press and hold theAUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display.Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the front orrear speakers. The middle position balancesthe sound between the speakers.

To set the balance and fade to the middleposition, select balance or fade and press andhold the AUDIO knob.The radio will beep once and will set the displaylevel to the middle position, To set all tone andspeaker controls to the middle position, pressand hold the AUDIO knob when tone or speakercontrols are not active. The radio will produceone beep and CENTERED will appear on thedisplay.

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the




131

D295C01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-295) (If installed)

8. SEEK/SCAN Button

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

HSM325

3. REVERSE Button

4. FORWARD Button

5. REPEAT Button11. Song List Mode

6. RANDOM Button1. LOAD Button

2. CD EJECT Button

9. Playing CD


132

D295D03O-AAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc playing will accommodate upto six discs.To insert one disc do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and release the LOAD Button.3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the

slot, to turn green.4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the

slot, label side up. The player will pull the discin.

NOTE:This CD player is suitable only for 12 cmdiscs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will bedisplayed. If you select an EQ setting for yourdisc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to playautomatically.

To inset multiple discs do the followings:

1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two

seconds.You will then hear two beeps and the light,located to the right of the slot, will begin toflash.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green.Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into theslot, label side up.The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the light will beginflashing again. Once the light stop flashingand turns green you can then load anotherdisc. The disc player takes up to six discs.Do not try to load more than six.When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol willbe displayed. If more than one disc has beenloaded, number for each disc will be dis-played. If you select an EQ setting for yourdisc, it will be activated each time you play adisc.If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded willbegin to play automatically.

4. To load more than one disc but less than six,complete Steps 1, 2 and 3. When you havefinished loading discs, with the radio on or off,press LOAD to cancel the loading function.The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

Playing a Specific Loaded CD

For every CD loaded, a number will appear onthe radio display. To play a specific CD, firstpress the CD select button to start playing a CD.Then press the numbered button that corre-sponds to the CD you want to play.

A small bar will appear under the CD number thatis playing, it could be due to one of the followingconditions:

o The road is too rough. The disc should playwhen the road is smoother.

o The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upsidedown.

o The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can'tbe corrected, please contact your dealer. Ifyour radio displays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer when report-ing the problem.

2. CD EJECT Button

This button will eject a disc or discs, if you havemultiple discs loaded. To eject a disc or discsfrom the disc player perform one of the followingsteps:

o Press and release the eject button to ejectthe disc that is currently playing.

o To eject all of the discs, press this button fortwo seconds, you will hear three beeps, andthe light will flash to let you know when a discis being ejected.


133

When the eject button is pressed, the receiverwill eject the disc and REMOVE CD will bedisplayed. You can now remove the disc. If thedisc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the discwill be automatically pulled back into the re-ceiver, If you try to push the disc back into thereceiver, before the 25 second time period iscomplete, the receiver will sense an error andwill try to eject the disc several times beforestopping. You cannot repeatedly press the ejectbutton to eject the disc after you have tried topush the CD in manually. The receivers 25-second eject timer will reset at each press ofeject, which will cause the receiver to not ejectthe disc until the 25-second time period haselapsed.

Once the player stops and the disc is ejected,remove the disc. After removing the disc, pressthe VOLUME PWR knob off and then on again.This will clear the disc-sensing feature andenable discs to be loaded into the player again.

3. REVERSE Button

Press and hold this button reverse quicklywithin a track. Release it to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.

4. FORWARD Button

Press and hold this button to advance quicklywithin a track. Release it to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.

5. REPEAT Button

With repeat button, you can repeat one track oran entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press and release the RPT button. RPTtrack will appear on the display. Press RPTagain to turn it off.

o To repeat the disc you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.Press RPT again to turn it off.

6. RANDOM Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential order, on all ofthe discs or on one disc.To use random, do the following:

o Press and release the RDM button to playthe tracks on all of the discs that are loaded,in random order. RDM will appear in thedisplay. Press RDM to turn if off.

o To play the tracks on the disc you arelistening to in random order, press and holdRDM for more than two seconds. You willhear three beeps and RDM will appear on thedisplay. Press RDM again to turn if off.

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

Press AUTO EQ to select the desired presetequalization setting while playing a compactdisc. The equalization will be automatically setwhenever you play a compact disc.

8. SEEK/SCAN BUTTONSEEK

Press the down arrow while playing a CD to goto the start of the current track if more than tenseconds have played. Press the up arrow to goto the next track. If you press the button morethan once, the player will continue moving back-ward or forward through the disc.


134

SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. Use SEEKSCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds.The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN willappear on the display. Press either SEEK SCANarrow again, to stop scanning.

DISC SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than four seconds until DISC SCAN ap-pears on the display and you hear a beep. UseDISC SCAN to listen to the first track, for tenseconds of each disc loaded. The sound willmute while scanning to the next track. DISCSCAN will appear on the display. Press eitherSEEK SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

9. Playing CD

o Insert the CD to start CD playback, duringradio operation or cassette tape playing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if you pressthe play button the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio or cassette playeris being used.

10. Using Song List Mode

The integrated 6-disc CD changer has a featurecalled song list. This feature is capable of saving20 track selections.

To save tracks into SONG LIST perform thefollowing steps:

1. The disc player must be on with at least onedisc loaded. See "LOAD/EJECT" previouslyfor more information.

2. The disc changer must not be in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear in the dis-play. If S-LIST is present, press SONG LISTto turn it off.

3. Select the desired disc by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use theSEEK SCAN up arrow button to locate thetrack that you want to save. The track willbegin to play.

4. Press and hold LIST for two or more sec-onds to save the track into memory. WhenLIST is pressed a beep will be heard imme-diately. After two seconds of pressing LISTcontinuously, two beeps will sound, to con-firm that the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

To play the song list, press LIST. One beep willbe heard and SLIST will appear on the display.The recorded tracks will begin to play in theorder that they were saved.You may seek through the song list by using theSEEK SCAN arrows. Seeking past the lastsaved track will return you to the first savedtrack.

To delete tracks from SONG LIST perform thefollowing steps:

1. The disc player must be turned on.2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list on.

S-LIST will appear on the display.3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the

desired track to be deleted.4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for

two seconds. When pressing SONG LISTone beep will be heard immediately. After twoseconds of pressing the SONG LIST buttoncontinuously, two beeps will be heard, toconfirm that the track had been deleted.

5. To delete entire lists, press and hold LISTbutton for > 4 seconds when pressing list,one beep will be heard immediately. After twoseconds of pressing the LIST button con-tinuously, two beeps will be heard. After 4seconds, a beep would be heard to confirmthat all the tracks had been deleted and thedisplay will show SLIST_EMPTY.


135










136 CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS

B850A02L

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingStorage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean. See drawing.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extendthe tape life and increase your listening enjoy-ment. Always protect your tapes and cassettecases from direct sunlight, severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use, cassettesshould always be stored in the original protec-tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature to becomemore comfortable before listening to your cas-settes.

B850A01L

B860A01L


137

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

Head

Cotton applicator

B860A01O

B860A02L

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-ers will develop a coating of tape residue thatcan result in deterioration of sound quality,such as a wavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commercially avail-able head cleaning tape or special solutionavailable from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully and neveroil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly woundon its reel before inserting in the player.Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to windup any slack.

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsettling in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be corrected byfast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem,do not continue to use the tape in yourvehicle.


138 ANTENNA

B870C01A-GAT

MANUAL ANTENNA (If installed)

Your car uses a manual stainless steel antennato receive both AM and FM broadcast signals.Pull up the antenna using your fingers, as shownin the drawing.

CAUTION:Before entering an automatic car wash or aplace with a low height clearance such as aresidential or commercial garage, be surethat the antenna is fully retracted.

!

B870C01ONOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tapeis loose, tighten it by turning one of thehubs with a pencil or your finger. If the labelis peeling off, do not put it in the drivemechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, letit reach a moderate temperature beforeputting it in the player.

B860A03L

B885A02O-AAT

MICRO ANTENNA (If installed)

Your car uses the micro antenna to receive bothAM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is folding and removable type.

CAUTION:

1. Be sure to fold the micro antenna beforeentering a garage with a low height orinstalling a car cover. In some vehicles,the antenna can be folded into only frontposition.

!

B885A01O


139

2. Before entering an automatic car wash,remove by turning the antenna counter-clockwise to prevent damage to the mi-cro antenna. To install the antenna, turnthe antenna clockwise.

B885B01O

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Risk of Rollover ............................................................ 2-3Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4Starting .......................................................................... 2-5Automatic Transaxle .............................................. 2-6, 2-9Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-13Brake Traction Control System (BTCS) ..................... 2-13Full Traction Control System (FTCS) ......................... 2-15Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-16Limited-Slip Differential ................................................ 2-19Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-19Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-20Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-22Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-24Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-28

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A01O-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garageany longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the airintake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3RISK OF ROLLOVER BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

!! WARNING:

o The 2WD Santa Fe is not designed foroff-road use. The 4WD Santa Fe is de-signed primarily for use on paved roads.However, occasional use in off-highwayconditions such as established unpavedroads and non-challenging off-roadtrails is allowed. The 4WD Santa Fe is notdesigned for blazing new trails, chal-lenging off-road conditions, or unpavedhill climbing. Exceeding the conditionsthat were intended for the vehicle's pri-mary design may result in injury or death.

o Utility vehicle has a significantly highercollision rate than other type of vehicles.

C020A01O-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

o Sports utility vehicles have higherground clearance and a narrower trackto make them capable of performing ina wide variety of off-road applications.Specific design characteristics give thema higher center of gravity than ordinarycars. An advantage of the higher groundclearance is a better view of the roadallowing you to anticipate problem. Theyare not designed for cornering at thesame speeds as conventional 2-wheeldrive vehicles any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to perform sat-isfactorily under off-road conditions. Ifat all possible, avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers. As with other vehicles ofthis type, failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of control orvehicle rollover.

o In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a person wearing aseatbelt.

WARNING:

C015A01O-AAT


4

!

!

KEY POSITIONS

C040A01A-AAT

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the car is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

C040A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

!

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

WARNING:Your vehicle is equipped with tires de-signed to provide for safe ride and handlingcapability.Do not use a size and type of tire and wheelthat is different from the one that is origi-nally installed on your vehicle. It can affectthe safety and performance of your vehicle,which could lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure to equipall four tires with the tire and wheel of thesame size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless de-cide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, you shouldnot use these tires for highway driving.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01L-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o Place the shift lever in "P" (park) and de-press the brake pedal fully.

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more than 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position.o The ignition key cannot be turned from

"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.

WARNING:Always wear appropriate shoes when oper-ating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.) may interfere with yourability to use the brake and acceleratorpedal, and the clutch (if installed).


5

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" positionfor more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,and then turn the steering wheel and keysimultaneously.

STARTING

!

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition keyC050A01A-AAT

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition

key counterclockwise from the "ACC" posi-tion to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C070C01E-1

C050A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START


6

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected, may be some-what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and theshifting sequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the T.C.M (TransaxleControl Module).

HSM3022-1

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

!

OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE (4 SPEED A/T)

C090A01O-GAT

(If installed)

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent selection.

HSM3022

C050B01L-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the brake pedal fully and place the

selector lever in "P" (park) position.3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"

position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.


7

!

C090E01O-AAT

o D(Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four gear sequence.

C090D02O-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and push thebutton when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During "D" rangeoperation, green lights indicate the gear cur-rently in use.

C090F01JM-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make gearshifts simple.

UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift upone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once toshift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwardsor backwards twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.

C090F01O


8

!

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2nd gear while in Sportmode will help prevent the vehicle fromrolling backwards.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recommendation.

!o To maintain the required levels of ve-

hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

CAUTION:o In sports mode, The driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For en-gine protection, upward shifts are madeautomatically when the engine rpmreaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector lever back-wards (-) twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Sincesudden engine braking and/or rapid ac-celeration can cause a loss of traction,however, downshifts must be made care-fully in accordance with the vehicle'sspeed.

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four forward

gears can be selected. To select reverseor park, move the selector lever to the "R"or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.


9

!

OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE (5 SPEED A/T)

C095A01O-AAT

(If installed)

HSM3022

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas five forward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selected automati-cally, depending on the position of the speedselector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates;the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent selection.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected may be some-what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and theshifting sequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the T.C.M (TransaxleControl Module).

HSM3022-1

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

!

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and push thebutton when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During sports modeoperation, green lights indicate the gear cur-rently in use.


10

CAUTION:o In sports mode the driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For en-gine protection, upward shifts are madeautomatically when the engine rpmreaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice, it is possible to skipone gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5thto 3rd. Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration can cause aloss of traction, however, downshiftsmust be made carefully in accordancewith the vehicle's speed.

!C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090E01L-AAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. This position is used formost city and highway driving, for starting froma full stop to maximum speed. The transaxle willautomatically shift through a five gear sequence.

C095F01O-GAT

Sports Mode

C090F01O

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make gearshifts simple.

UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shiftup one gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backward once to shiftdown one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwardsor backwards twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.


11

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five forward

gears can be selected. To select reverseor park, move the selector lever to the"R" or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D" posi-tion.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2nd gear while in Sportmode will help prevent the vehicle fromrolling backwards.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recomendation.

!


12

!

!

C090N04O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

o Optimum vehicle performance and economyis obtained by smoothly depressing andreleasing the accelerator pedal.

o If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt torock the vehicle free by moving it for-ward and backward. Do not attempt thisprocedure if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During the rock-ing operation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward of backward as it becomesunstuck, causing injury or damage tonearby people or objects.

WARNING:


13ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A02A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:During ABS operation, a pulsation may befelt in the brake pedal when the brakes areapplied. Also, a noise may be heard in theengine compartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicate that theanti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.

BRAKE TRACTION CONTROL SYS-TEM (BTCS)

! WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions. During theseconditions the vehicle should be driven atreduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-

ted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

C300A02O-AAT

(If installed)

On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car toaccelerate. It also helps to provide sufficientdriving force and steering performance as thecar turns.

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the driven wheels.

Driving Hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure todecelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.


14

C300D02O-AAT

Indicator and Warning

The TCS indicator should illuminate when theignition key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after approximately three seconds.If the indicator does not illuminate, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in theTCS system while driving, TCS illuminates as awarning.If TCS illuminates, pull your car to a safe placeand stop the engine. Then, start the engineagain to check if the TCS indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:When the TCS indicator illuminates, trac-tion control is automatically deactivated.

C300B01O-AAT

TCS ON Mode

When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicatorin the instrument cluster will blink.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.

2) When the traction control system is op-erating properly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle. This is only theeffect of the brake control and indicatesnothing unusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click may beheard from the engine compartment;however, this is the sound of the tractioncontrol being checked.

4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.

!

! CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP func-tion has been activated. It also means thatthe road is slippery or your car is accelerat-ing excessively. In this situation, gentlyrelease foot pressure from the acceleratorpedal and maintain moderate speed.

WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road surfacesshould be observed.


15FULL TRACTION CONTROL SYS-TEM (FTCS)

C310A01O-AAT

(If installed)

On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car toaccelerate. It also helps to provide sufficientdriving force and steering performance as thecar turns.

HSM434

!

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the front wheels.

Driving Hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure todecelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.

CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP controlhas been activated. It also means that theroad is slippery or your car is acceleratingexcessively. In this situation, release footpressure from the accelerator pedal andmaintain moderate speed.

WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road surfacesshould be observed.

!

C310B02O-AAT

TCS ON/OFF Mode

When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicatorin the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the TCSswitch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP controlwill be deactivated. Adjust you driving accord-ingly. To turn the system back on, press theswitch again. The TCS-OFF indicator should gooff.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.

2) When the traction control system is op-erating properly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indicatesnothing unusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click may beheard from the engine compartment;this is the sound of the traction controlbeing checked.

4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.


16

! WARNING:This vehicle is designed primarily for onroad use. Driving the vehicle in challengingoff-road conditions may result in damageto the vehicle. Driving in conditions thatexceed the vehicle's intended design or thedriver's experience level may result in se-vere injury or death.

Driving 4WD Safely

(1)As always, be sure to wear the seat belt.(2)Do not drive in challenging off-road condi-

tions or areas that exceed the vehicle'sbasic design intent or the driver's experi-ence level.

(3)Drive at lower speeds in strong crosswinds.Because of your vehicle's higher center ofgravity, its stability will be affected in cross-winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehiclecontrol.

(4)Check the brake condition after driving in wetor muddy conditions. Press the brake sev-eral times as you move slowly until you feelnormal braking forces return.

FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION

C350A03O-AAT

(If installed)

Engine power can be delivered to all wheels.Full-time 4WD is useful when good traction isrequired, such as, when driving on slippery, wetor snow-covered roads and when moving outof mud. Your vehicle is not designed for chal-lenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD vehiclesare designed primarily to improve traction andperformance on paved roads and highways inwet and/or slippery conditions. Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roadsand trails is considered normal use. It is alwaysimportant when traveling off-highway that thedriver carefully reduce their speed to a level thatdoes not exceed the safe operating speed forthose conditions. In general, off-road conditionsprovide less traction and braking effectivenessthan on road conditions. These factors must becarefully considered when driving off-road.Keeping the vehicle in contact with the drivingsurface and under control in these conditions isalways the driver's responsibility for the safetyof him/herself and his or her passengers.

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after approximately three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS orTCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in theTCS System while driving, TCS-OFF indicatorilluminates as a warning.If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,traction control is automatically deacti-vated.


17

(5)Do not drive the vehicle through water. (i.e.streams, rivers, lakes, etc.)

(6)The stopping distance of the full-time 4WDvehicle differs very little from that of the 2WDvehicle.When driving on a snow-covered road or aslippery, muddy surface, make sure thatyou keep a sufficient distance between yourvehicle and the one ahead of you.

(7)Since the driving torque is always applied toall 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the con-dition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with fourtires of the same size and type.o When replacement of any of the tires or

wheels is necessary, replace all of themwith tires or wheels of the same size type.

o Rotate the tires and check the tire pres-sure at regular intervals.

!(8)The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot be

towed by an ordinary tow truck. Makesure that the vehicle is towed with allfour wheels raised off the ground.o Roadside Assistance Program:

Off-roading is not covered. To receiveservice, the vehicle must be on a publiclymaintained road.

o If the vehicle is towed with only twowheels raised off the ground, the 4WDsystem could be damaged.

o In unavoidable cases, if the vehicle isbeing towed with all four wheels on theground, it should only be towed forward.

o While towing, check the following items.1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or

"ON".2. Place the shift lever in neutral (For

Automatic Transaxle, "N" position).3. Release the parking brake.

NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-hicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not formore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

WARNING:Your vehicle is equipped with tires de-signed to provide for safe ride and handlingcapability.Do not use a size and type of tire and wheelthat is different from the one that is origi-nally installed on your vehicle. It can affectthe safety and performance of your vehicle,which could lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure to equipall four tires with the tire and wheel of thesame size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless de-cide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, you shouldnot use these tires for highway driving.


18

! CAUTION:o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being

raised on a jack, never start the engine orcause the tires to rotate.There is danger that rotating tires touch-ing the ground could cause the vehicleto go off the jack and to jump forward.

o If one of the front or rear wheels beginsto spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehiclecan sometimes be driven out by de-pressing the accelerator pedal further;however, avoid running the engine con-tinuously at high rpm because doing socould damage the 4WD system.

(10)When using tire chains, be sure to install thechains on all wheels.

(11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in themud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WDsystem could be damaged.

o In rare cases when it's unavoidable thata 4WD vehicle is to be inspected on a2WD roll tester, strictly follow the proce-dures.1. Check the tire pressures recom-

mended for your vehicle.2. Place the front wheels on the roll

tester as shown in the illustration.3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-

rary free roller as shown in the illustra-tion.

! WARNING:Keep away from the front of the vehiclewhile inspecting. This is very dangerous asthe vehicle can jump forward and causeserious injury or death.

HSM281Roll tester(Speedometer)

Temporary free roller

CAUTION:Never engage the parking brake while per-forming these tests.

!

(9)For a speedometer test or inspection/main-tenance (I/M) program of a SANTA FE 4WDvehicle, use a four wheel chassis dynamom-eter.


19

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane charges orfast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a person wearing aseat belt.

o Loss of control may occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

D190A01HP-GAT

(If installed)

A limited-slip differential, if equipped, is for therear wheel differential only. The features of thislimited-slip differential are described below:Just as with a conventional differential, thewheel on one side is allowed to turn at a differentspeed from the wheel on the other side when thevehicle is cornering. The difference betweenthe limited-slip differential and a conventionaldifferential is that if the wheel on one side of thevehicle loses traction, a greater amount oftorque is applied to the rear wheel on the otherside to improve traction.

CAUTION:o Never start the engine with the gearshift

lever placed in the forward or reversewhile one of the rear wheels is jacked upand the other in contact with theground; doing so may cause the vehicleto jump forward.

o Use only recommended oil for LSD inthe rear axle.See page 9-5 for the recommended oildescriptions.

!

!

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

C130A01L-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of thecargo area cover behind the rear seat. Ifthere were an accident or a sudden stop,such objects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car topull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly while driving slowly until thebraking action returns to normal, taking careto keep the car under control at all times. Ifthe braking action does not return to normal,stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.


20 DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A02A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is an ac-cumulation of snow or ice around or near therear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If thereis a risk that the parking brake may freeze,apply it only temporarily while you put thegear selector lever in "P" and block the rearwheels so the car cannot roll. Then releasethe parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransaxle to overheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o Don't let your car creep forward. To avoidcreeping forward, keep your foot firmly onthe brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmlyengage the parking brake and place the gearselector lever in "P". If your car is facingdownhill, turn the front wheels into the curbto help keep the car from rolling. If your caris facing uphill, turn the front wheels awayfrom the curb to help keep the car fromrolling. If there is no curb or if it is required byother conditions to keep the car from rolling,block the wheels.


21

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. After the engine hasstarted, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.In very cold weather, however, give yourengine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.


22

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6. The level of chargein your battery can be checked by your Hyundaidealer or a service station.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.

NOTE:o Tire chains are not legal in all states.

Check state laws before fitting tirechains.

o Tire chains are to be used on front tiresonly. If your vehicle is equippied with the4WD (four wheels drive), be sure to in-stall the chains on all wheels.

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C160B01O-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very hazardouspractices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.Also, apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire will providea greater driving force, but will not prevent sideskids.

WINTER DRIVING


23

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved window washeranti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers andmost auto parts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the paint finish.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C160I01L-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.Then release the parking brake.


24 TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

!

C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen, as well as to see.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.


25

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See Maintenance UnderSevere Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your carand the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail, thetrailer or vehicle could wander dangerouslyacross other lanes of traffic and ultimately leavethe roadway. To eliminate this potentially dan-gerous situation, safety chains, attached be-tween your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,are required in most states.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 12%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

!

x 100 = 10% (MAX)

C190E04O-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.

C190E01L

Total trailer weight

Tongue load Total trailer weight


26

!

4. The gross combination weight (sum ofyour vehicle weight plus its load and thetotal trailer weight) must not exceed thefollowing.

4WD

-

7400(3357)

7700(3493)

Lbs. (kg)

2WD

6000(2721)

7700(3493)

8000(3629)

Combination WeightEngine

2.4

2.7

3.5

WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

o Do not exceed 45 mph or the postedtowing speed limit, whichever is lower.

2.4(2WD)

2.7(2WD)

2.7(4WD)

3.5(2WD)

3.5(4WD)

Tongue

170(77.1)

120(54.4)

320(145.2)

270(122.5)

270(122.5)

220(99.8)

350(158.8)

300(136.1)

300(136.1)

250(113.4)

100(45.3)

120(54.4)

120(54.4)

150(68.0)

Lbs. (kg)

Trailer

1700(771)

1200(544)

3200(1452)

2700(1225)

2700(1225)

2200(998)

3500(1588)

3000(1361)

3000(1361)

2500(1134)

1000(453)

1200(544)

1200(544)

1500(680)

Maximum Towable Weight

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

With

Brake

Without

Brake

Without

Brake

+ABS

Engine

2.4(2WD)

2.7(2WD)

2.7(4WD)

3.5(2WD)

3.5(4WD)

2.4(2WD)

2.7(2WD)

2.7(4WD)

3.5(2WD)

3.5(4WD)

Type A : Vehicle carrying 2 passengersType B : Vehicle carrying 5 passengers

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the cargo area can overloadthe rear axle. Redistribute the load andcheck the axle weight again.

! CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart.


27

C190F02O-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do nottow a trailer with the transaxle engaged inoverdrive gear.

4. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

5. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

7. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in Park. In addition, place wheelchocks at each of the trailer's tires.

8. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

9. During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still working.

10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakesto overheat, resulting in reduced brakingefficiency.

13.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshift thetransaxle to a lower gear and reduce speedto reduce chances of engine overloadingand/or overheating.

14.If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parking brakeor footbrake.

15.If the transaxle shifts frequently while goingup a hill, shift down one gear.

NOTE:When towing, check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

!


28

However the seating capacity may bereduced based upon the weight of all ofthe occupants, and the weight of thecargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includingoccupants and cargo, the vehicle cancarry.

Towing capacity:Towing capacity is the maximum trailerweight including its cargo weight, yourvehicle can tow. See the section "Traileror Vehicle Towing" for specificationsabout the trailer weight.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on theweight and the number of occupantsand the tongue load, if your vehicle isequipped with a trailer.

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Vehicle capacity weight:880 lbs (400 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weight in-cludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total: 5 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons,Rear seat: 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F02JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030A02O-A

I030A03O-A

Type A

Type B


29

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle. C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(489 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

A B C


30

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3

A B C

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C


31

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01JM

!

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on the left and rightsides of the centerline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle and vehicle ca-pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-ings can cause an accident orvehicle damage. You can calcu-late the weight of your load byweighing the items (or people)before putting them in the vehicle.Be careful not to overload yourvehicle.

WARNING:o Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either themaximum front or rear GAWR andvehicle capacity weight. If you do,parts, including tires on your ve-hicle can break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.


32

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they move as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strike the driver or a passenger.

! WARNING:o Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possible tirefailure that could lead to a crash.

o Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to a crash.

o A crash resulting from poor han-dling vehicle damage, tire failure,or increased stopping distancescould result in serious injury ordeath.

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6If Your Vehicle Must be Towed ................................... 3-12Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-14If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-15 3


3

32


D010B01O

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B01L-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coil and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assistance.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. Be sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the illustration. First,attach one clamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of the dischargedbattery.

Then attach the other end of the same cableto the positive (+) post or cable of the boosterbattery. Next, using the other cable, attachone clamp to the negative (-) post or cableof the booster battery. Then attach the otherend of that cable to a solid metal part of theengine of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery away from the battery. Do not con-nect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for severalminutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

D020A01O

Boosterbattery

Dischargedbattery

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

!

!

WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from moving partssuch as the fan and drive belts to preventinjury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if coolant has beenlost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there is aleak in the cooling system and this shouldbe checked as soon as possible by a Hyundaidealer.

D030A02L-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car. (If theair conditioning had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from it when youstop).


5SPARE TIRE

D040A01O-GAT

The following instructions for the FULLSIZE spare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the spare tire,and adjust to the specified pressure.The tire pressure should be periodicallychecked and maintained at the speci-fied pressure while the tire is stored.

Spare Tire Pressure

D040B02B-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Tire SizeInflation Pressure

Full Size30 psi (207 kPa)

To remove the spare tire

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting bolt cover with

a screw driver or coin.

D040B01O 3. Loosen the mounting bolt with a wheelnut wrench.

D040B02O

36


CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A02O-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"and that the parking brake is set, then:

HSM4016

4. Lift up the hanger and separate itfrom the holder, then lower the hangerand remove the spare tire.

To reinstall the spare tire

1. Set the spare tire on the center of thehanger, and then raise the hangerand hook it onto the holder.

2. Tighten the mounting bolt with thewheel nut wrench.

3. Install the mounting bolt cover with ascrew driver.

D050A01L-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow down whiledriving straight ahead. Do not applythe brakes immediately or attempt topull off the road as this may cause aloss of control. When the car hasslowed to such a speed that it is safeto do so, brake carefully and pull offthe road. Drive off the road asfar as possible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a divided high-way, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxlein "P".

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-tions provided on the following pages.

D040B03O


7

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the WheelD060B02O-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Remove the spare tire and remove thejack and tool bag from the luggagecompartment.

NOTE:The spare tire is located underneaththe car.

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

D060B01O HSM4015

Flat tire

!WARNING:

Your vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide for safe ride andhandling capability.Do not use a size and type of tire andwheel that is different from the onethat is originally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, whichcould lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure toequip all four tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type, tread,brand and load-carrying capacity. Ifyou nevertheless decide to equipyour vehicle with any tire/wheel com-bination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, youshould not use these tires for high-way driving.

38


D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

D060E01O HFC4022

Wrench bar

Wheel nutwrench

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HSM4018


9

!

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

WARNING:Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

!

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

WARNING:Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub.

D060G01O

D060G02O

310


!D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise.

D060I01O

D060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

D060H01O

If there is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-face between the wheel and hub, thewheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

WARNING:


11

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it until

HSM5014

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated com-pletely over the nut. Do not stand on thewrench handle or use an extension pipeover the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

HSM4019

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

it is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place andreturn the jack and tools to their properstorage locations.

312


IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be doneby your Hyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service. This will help assure that yourvehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather than riskdamage to your car, it is suggested that youshow this information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is used andthat all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle be towedwith a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipmentwith all the wheels off the ground.

!

D080B02O-AAT

Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Vehicle

HSM4027

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift typetruck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

1)

2)

3) dollyCAUTION:

o Your vehicle can be damaged if towedincorrectly!

o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing thekey in the "ACC" position.

!

HSM4028

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.


13

!1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear

wheels on the ground, be sure the parkingbrake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged or the vehicle isbeing towed with the front wheels on theground, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

HSM4029

D080B02O-AAT

Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Vehicle

HSM4027-1

dolly

dolly

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle. Be sure touse a towing dolly under the front wheels.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must be towedby lifting all 4 wheels or using the towing dolly.

314


For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to one of the towing hooks underthe front/rear of your car. Be very careful whenattempting this procedure when the vehicle is onany unpaved surface to avoid damage to yourvehicle.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed car tosteer it and operate the brakes.

NOTE:o To avoid serious damage to your 4WD

vehicle, limit the towing to 10 mph andnot for more than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

o Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.

D080D02O-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWING

HSM430

HSM4037

<Front>

<Rear>

Towing Hooks

Towing Hook

CAUTION:o The 4WD vehicle should never be towed

with the wheels on the ground. This cancause serious damage to the transaxleor the 4WD system.

o When towing the vehicle, take care not tocause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

!

HSM4030

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.


15IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

! CAUTION:If the car is being towed with all four wheelson the ground, it can be towed only from thefront. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral.Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mphand for more than 15 miles.Be sure the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position. A driver mustbe in the towed vehicle to operate thesteering and brakes.

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4

smhma-4.p65 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM1

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-sion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperationand assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

smhma-4.p65 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM2

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulationsof mud or corrosive materials. Use a goodquality car-washing solution and follow themanufacturer's directions on the package.These are available at your Hyundai dealer orauto parts outlet. Don't use strong householddetergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abra-sive cleaning powders as these may damagethe finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

smhma-4.p65 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM3


4

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer's directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

smhma-4.p65 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM4

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholsteredsurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust anddirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or itmay work into the surface of the leather, caus-ing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleanedwhen necessary. Washing leather thoroughlywith soap and water will keep your leatherlustrous, beautiful and ensure you have manyyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mildsoap and lukewarm water, work up a goodlather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe cleanwith a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils areincorporated through processing that none needbe applied during the life of the leather. Oilapplied to the finished surface will in no way helpthe leather and may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes should neverbe used under any conditions.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

smhma-4.p65 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM5


6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

smhma-4.p65 3/9/2005, 4:25 PM6

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, manual orauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on whichare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to the quality of theoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-book provides further information about yourwarranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3

F020A02Y-AAT

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-5.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.


4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B02O-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSES

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

15

24

12

R

I

22.5

36

18

R

30

48

24

R

I

I

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

45

72

36

R

I

52.5

84

42

R

R

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

I

R

R

R

67.5

108

54

R

75

120

60

R

I

82.5

132

66

R

90

144

72

R

I

I

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

105

168

84

R

R

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

120

192

96

R

I

I

I

R

R

R

127.5

204

102

R

135

216

108

R

I

142.5

228

114

R

150

240

120

R

I

I

I

R

R

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.


5

See Note *1

See Note *2

See Note *3

Note : *1. For every 12 months or 10,000 miles (15,000 km), whichever occurs first: "R"*2. Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km).*3. With LSD- Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) and replace every 50,000 miles (80,000 km).

Without LSD- lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).

F030C08O-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE PADS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD)

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD)

PROPELLAR SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN (4WD)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

3.5 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

7.5

12

6

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

30

48

24

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

60

96

48

I

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

75

120

60

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

90

144

72

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

105

168

84

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

120

192

96

I

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

150

240

120

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal

tempera ture or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperatureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

F040A05O-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

*1. Transfer case Oil and Rear Axle Oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE PADS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) *1

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) *1

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY




With LSD

Without LSD

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G

C, E, F

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

C, E, G, I

C, E, G, I


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connec-tions

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060F01O-AAT

o Vacuum Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS


8

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrongATF may result in damage to the ATM.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

F065F01O-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hose

Inspect the surface of hose for evidence of heatand/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittlerubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterioration. Par-ticular attention should be paid to examine thathose surface nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hosedoes not come in contact with any heat source,sharp edges or moving component which mightcause heat damage or mechanical wear. In-spect all hose connections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hose should bereplaced immediately if there is any evidence ofdeterioration or damage.


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070H01O-AAT

o Rear Brake Discs and Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake discs and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-10Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-13Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-16Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-17Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-19Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-20Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-22Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-23Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-26Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-32Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-33

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

G010B01O-AAT

(2.7 V6)

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Brake fluid reservoir3. Air cleaner4. Fuse and Relay box

5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir6. Power steering fluid reservoir7. Engine oil level dipstick8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil filler cap10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick11. Battery

G010B01O

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic cover ofthe engine is not damaged.

!

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G010C01O-AAT

(3.5 V6)

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse and Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil level dipstick10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick11. Battery

HSM424

1 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic cover ofthe engine is not damaged.

!

2


4 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

G030B01JM-U

GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01L-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning correctly,inspect it carefully and seek assistance fromyour Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

G020A01L-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter condition


5

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil LevelBefore checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour car is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.

Wait five minutes , then remove the dipstick,wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdrawit again. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("F") and lower ("L") range.

G030C01O

HSM427

3.5 V6

2.7 V6

!WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when checking the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.The engine oil quality should meet the following

classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferredregardless of regional option and en-gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil isnot available, secondary recommendedengine oil for corresponding tempera-ture range can be used.


6

G040A02LOil filter

Oil filler cap3.5 V6

CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

G040A04A-GAT

Oil filler cap

Oil filter

2.7 V6

G040A01B

!

!

G030D01O-AAT

Adding Oil 1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

G030D02O

G030D03O

3.5 V6

2.7 V6

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil using bya funnel. Do not overfill not to damageengine.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:


7

!

The engine oil and filter should be changed atthose intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil and filterchanges are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter isas follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and let itwarm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above the lowestmark. Turn the engine off and place the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or reversegear (manual transaxle).

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oilfiller cap.

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen thedrain plug by turning it counterclockwise witha wrench of the proper size. Be sure that adrain pan is in position to catch the oil as itdrains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you!

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replacethe drain plug using a new gasket and re-tighten by turning it clockwise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the propersize. A certain amount of oil will come outwhen you remove the filter. So be sure tohave your drain pan in place underneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mountingsurface on the engine is clean and that theold gasket is removed completely. Lubricatethe new gasket on the filter with clean engineoil before installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

! CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil using bya funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damagemay occur if overfilled.

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it in with the householdtrash.


8

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handlingused oil.


9

!

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cool. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

G050C01O

G050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

G050D01O

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finish ofyour car. If you spill engine coolant on thecar, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-ing brake and remove the radiator cap whencool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-out pressing down on it, until it stops. Thisrelieves any pressure remaining in the cool-ing system. And remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turning counterclock-wise.

3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized ordistilled water. Continue to add clean dem-ineralized or distilled water in small quantitiesuntil the fluid level stays up in the radiatorneck.


10

G060B02O-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use sparkplugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

NOTE:o When replacing the spark plug, genuine

Hyundai replacement parts are recom-mended.

o It is recommended that the spark plugshould be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

Recommended Spark Plugs:

SPARK PLUGS

G060A02Y-AAT

Your engine was originally equipped with plati-num-tipped spark plugs.Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last longer thanconventional type spark plugs and can beidentified by blue lines on the ceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped sparkplugs.

G060A01L

0.039 ~ 0.043 in.(1.0~1.1 mm)

!

G050D02O

6. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".

7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION)

PFR5N-11 (NGK)


11WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADESCHANGING THE AIR CLEANERFILTER

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundai re-placement parts or their equivalent.

HSM5017

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

HSM5009

!! CAUTION:

o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline, etc.

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper tothe vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with the lockingclip (1) pressed to detach it from the wiperarm.

HHR5048

(1)


12 FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A02O-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters).

G090A01O

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm andlower the wiper blade at the level of the wiperarm as shown in the drawing.

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear anaudible "click" to engage in the end of thewiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against thewindshield.

HHR5051

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull up it.

To install the wiper blade

HHR5049

HHR5050


13

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.

o The washer should not be operated if thewasher reservoir is empty. This can dam-age the washer fluid pump.

!

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe checked at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically redcolor. As driving distance increases, thefluid color turns darkish red gradually. It isa normal condition and you should notjudge the need to replace based upon thechanging color.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule insection 5.

!WARNING:

o Windshield washer fluid agents containsome amounts of alcohol and can beflammable under certain circumstances.Do not allow sparks or flame to contactthe washer fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicle or itsoccupants could occur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals. Do not drink wind-shield washer fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.

!

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended FluidYour Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands meeting the SP III specifica-tion approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damagecaused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered byyour new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle.Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands meeting the SP III specification ap-proved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you arehaving your vehicle serviced at a facilityother than a Hyundai dealer, verify that thecorrect ATF is used for your vehicle.


14

HSM425

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, thenremove it again. Now check the fluid level onthe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" rangeon the dipstick.

!

G110D02O-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.

HSM3022

G110C01O-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is8.98 U.S. quarts (8.5 liters).

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hotso you should exercise great care not toburn yourself during this procedure.


15CHECKING THE BRAKES

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

!WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

HJM5044

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnelto add transaxle fluid through the dipsticktube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.Do not overfill.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your brakingsystem. Follow the instructions printed on thecontainer.

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

HSM5011


16

G140D02A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

G190A02B

A/Ccomp.

Crankshaft pulley

Power steeringpulleyAuto tensioner

Generator

2.7 V6

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt, thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

!

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.


17

When the air conditioning is being used regu-larly, the compressor drive belt tension shouldbe checked at least once a month with theengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press down onthe belt halfway between the engine crankshaftand compressor pulleys. Pressing with yourfinger, you should not be able to deflect this beltanymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the belt is tooloose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

G140D02L

3.5 V6

A/C pulley

GeneratorPower steering pulley

Crankshaft pulley

CHANGING THE CLIMATE CON-TROL AIR FILTER

B145A03O-GAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)(If Installed)

The climate control air filter is located in front ofthe evaporator unit behind the glove box.It helps to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.

1. Open the glove box and take out the damperstrap through the hole.

HSM412

2. Lower the glove box down completely bypushing the both sides of the glove boxinward.

HSM345

HSM442

3. Turn over the wall paper on the climatecontrol air filter cover.


18

HSM443

5. Replace two climate control air filters bypulling the knob of the air conditioner filteroutward.

6. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-bly.

!

4. Turn the knob of the climate control air filtercover counterclockwise and remove theclimate control air filter cover.

HSM444

CAUTION:Be sure to install the climate control air filterin the direction of the arrow sign. Other-wise, it may cause noise or deterioration.

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-AAT

STEERING WHEEL

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater thanspecified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G150A01O

1.18 in.(30 mm)


19CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G190A01A-AAT

Auto tensioner

2.7 V6

3.5 V6

Power steering pulley

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

G180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brake pedalclearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

2.95 in. (75 mm)

G170A01A-AAT

BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine off, press down on the brakepedal several times to reduce the vacuum in thebrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowly onthe brake pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.The free-play should be within the limits speci-fied in the illustration above. If it is not, have itinspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G160A01HR

0.12 ~ 0.31 in.(3 ~ 8 mm)

G190A02B

A/Ccomp.

Crankshaft pulley

Power steeringpulley

Generator

G140D02L

A/C pulley

Generator

Crankshaft pulley


20

Drive belts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted if necessary. At thesame time, belts should be examined for cracks,wear, fraying or other evidence of deteriorationand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to be surethere is no interference between the belts andother parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,the new belt should be adjusted again after twoor three weeks to eliminate slack resulting frominitial stretching after use.

CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

G200A03A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box in theengine compartment for easy inspection.

G200A01O

GoodOpen-Replace

! CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.


21

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a newfuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

G200B02L

Good Open-Replace

G200B02HP-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuses

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found low on the dashboardon the driver's side. Inside the box you will finda list showing the circuits protected by eachfuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown (open) fusecould be the reason. If the fuse has opened, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasmelted through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:

HSM4002

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.

Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in therelay and fuse box of the engine room tosimplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even if youfind one that appears to have opened.

G200A02O


22 CHECKING THE BATTERY

! CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is a prob-lem in the electrical circuit. If you replace afuse and it blows as soon as the accessoryis turned on, the problem is serious andshould be referred to a Hyundai dealer fordiagnosis and repair. Never replace a fusewith anything except a fuse with the sameor a lower amperage rating. A higher capac-ity fuse could cause damage and create afire hazard.

NOTE:See page 6-33 for the fuse panel descrip-tions. !

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

D010B01O

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.


23POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

HSM5010

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!

!

G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser cooling fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.


24

G250A01A-AAT

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUTYOUR HYUNDAI

If you desire additional information about main-taining and servicing your Hyundai, you maypurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundaidealer's parts department. This is the samemanual used by dealership technicians andwhile it is highly technical it can be useful inobtaining a better understanding of your car andhow it works.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be replacedif there is severe surface cracking, pulling,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A02O-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times.Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on theheadlights (Low beam).

5. Open the hood.

G290A01O

Verticalaiming


25

SPECIFICATION:

"H";Horizontal center line of headlights fromground: 2WD : 32.5 in.(822 mm)

4WD : 33.3 in.(843 mm)"W";Distance between each headlight center:46.5 in.(1,178 mm)

"L";Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against:118 in. (3,000 mm).

Vertical line

G290B01O-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using anaiming chart as shown in the illustration. Turn onthe headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light isparallel to center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centerof headlights.

G290A03O

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

Ground line

"P"Horizontal line

!

6. Draw a vertical line (through the center ofeach headlight beam pattern) and a horizon-tal line (through the center of each headlightbeam pattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted byan authorized Hyundai dealer.


26 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

!

G260A03A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.

See page 6-32 for the wattage description.

NOTE:After heavy, driving rain or washing, head-light and taillight lenses could appear frosty.This condition is caused by the tempera-ture difference between the lamp insideand outside. This is similar to the conden-sation on your windows inside your vehicleduring the rain and doesn’t indicate a prob-lem with your vehicle. If the water leaks intothe lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehiclechecked by an Authorized Hyundai Dealer.

CAUTION:Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

G270A02O-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,remove the headlight assembly mountingbolts.

HSM353

G270A01O

5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

HSM328


27

9. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.

10.Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

11.Check for proper headlight aim.

HSM331

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

HSM329

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

HSM330

8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.


28

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

G270A03O

12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,remove from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb. Do not touch the glass of the newbulb.

HSM332

G270B02O-GAT

Rear Combination Light

G270B01O

(3)

(1)

(2)

G270B02O


29

HSM342

3. Replace with a new bulb.

G270C01O-AAT

Luggage Compartment Light

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the cover with a flat-head screw-

driver.

HSM341

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting screws of the rear

combination light as shown with a phillipsscrewdriver.

(1)

(2)

(3)

G270B03O

3. To replace the rear combination light, take itout from the bulb holder by turning it coun-terclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Back-up light(3) Turn signal light

4. Install the new bulb.


30

G270E01O-AAT

Front Side Marker Light

1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw-driver.

HSM334

HSM335

HSM336

2. Disconnect the connector.


G270G01O-AAT

Interior Light

HSM343

1. Remove the cover with a flat-head screw-driver.


31

G270E02L

HTB284

3. Disconnect the connector.


HSM344


G270H01O-AAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

1. Open the glove box.2. Remove the cover with a flat-head screw-

driver.

HSM366


32

Socket type

S8.5/8.5

P43t

BA15d

BA9s

BA9s

S8.5/8.5

PG13

W2.1×9.5D

Part Name

Front Door Edge Warning Light (If installed)

Luggage Compartment Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light (If installed)

Rear Combination Light

Turn Signal Light

Stop/Tail Light (Side Marker Light)

Back-up Light

License Plate Light

Wattage

5

10

17

27

27/8(8)

27

5

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

BULB WATTAGE

G280A03O-AAT

G280A01O-A

Part Name

Glove Box Illuminated Light

Headlight (Low/High)

Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light

Map Light

Interior Light

Front Fog Light (If installed)

Side Marker Light

Wattage

5

55/60

28/8

10

5

10

27

5

No.

With sunroof

Without sunroof

8

9

10

11

12

Socket type

W2.1×4.6D

S8.5/8.5

W-2

BA15s

BA15d

BA15s

W2.1×9.5D


33FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C02O-AAT

Engine Compartment

G200C01O

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect thefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

FUSE

RATING

140A

50A

50A

40A

30A

30A

40A

30A

40A

20A

15A

10A

10A

20A

20A

10A

15A

20A

10A

10A

10A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Generator

Tail lamp relay, Fuse 11~17, Power connector

Start relay, Ignition switch

A/C Fuse, Blower relay

ABS control module, Air bleeding connector

ABS control module, Air bleeding connector

Engine contorl relay

Power window relay, Fuse 26

Radiator fan relay

Condenser fan relay

Fog lamp relay

Left head lamp, Instrument cluster, DRL control module

Right head lamp

Ignition failure sensor, Oxygen sensor

Injector

Check engine ind, ECM, PCM

Fuel pump relay, ECM, TCM, Generator, PCM

ATM contorl relay, 4WD control module

Horn relay

A/C relay

PCM, ECM

ALT

B+

IGN

BLR

ABS.1

ABS.2

ECU

P/W

RAD FAN

C/FAN

FRT FOG

H/LP(LH)

H/LP(RH)

ECU #1

ECU #2

ECU #3

ECU(B+)

ATM

HORN

A/C

ST SIG

FUSIBLE

LINK

FUSE

DESCRIPTION


34

G200E01O-AAT

Inner Panel

G200E01O-A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Cigarette lighter & Power outletAudio, Power outside mirrorDigital clock, Rear power outletCruise controlHead lamp relaySeat warmerRear wiper motor controlRear window defogger, Power outside mirrorA/C control, Sunroof controller, Electrical chrome mirror(Not used)Room lamp, Door warning switch, Door lamp, Manual A/C control, Homelink controllerDigatal clock, ETACM, Audio, SirenAMP speakersStop lamp, Data link connector, Multipurpose check connectorHazard lampPower seat, Rear wiper motor controlSunroof controllerDefogger relayInstrument cluster, Pre-excitation resistor, ETACM, Auto light sensor,DRL control module, GeneratorSRS control moduleECM (V6 2.7L)Instrument cluster (Airbag IND)ABS control module, G-Sensor, Air bledding connector, 4WD control moduleTurn signal lampBack-up lamps, TCM, Vehicle speed secsor, ETS control module, Ignition failure sensorDoor lock/unlock relay, Key lock/unlock relayTail & parking lamp (LH), Turn signal lamp, License lampTail & parking lamp (RH), Fog lamp relay, Switch illuminationETS control module (V6 3.5L), Fail safety relayRadiator fan relay, Condenser fan relayFront wiper motor, Wiper relay, Washer motor

FUSERATING

20A10A15A10A10A25A10A10A10A10A10A15A20A10A10A25A20A30A

10A

15A10A10A10A10A10A20A10A10A15A10A20A

FUSE

F1F2F3F4F5F6F7F8F9F10F11F12F13F14F15F16F17F18

F19

F20F21F22F23F24F25F26F27F28F29F30F31

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2EGR System................................................................. 7-3Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7

smhma-7.p65 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM1

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicleperformace.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The positive crankcase ventilation system isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies filtered air to thecrankcase through the air intake hose. Insidethe crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through the PCV valveand into the induction system.

H010A03O-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control Sys-tem)

o 2.7 V6 - To prevent the vehicle frommisfiring during dynamometer testing,disconnect the ABS connector in theengine compartment. After dynamom-eter testing is completed, erase the ABS/TCS DTC (Diagnotic Trouble Code) witha GST (Generic Scan Tool) or Hi-ScanPro. For more information, see shopmanual (Wheel Speed Sensor).

(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the canister. When theengine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed inthe canister are drawn into the induction systemthrough the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.

o 3.5 V6 - To prevent the vehicle frommisfiring during dynamometer testing,turn the Traction Control System (TCS)off by pressing the TCS switch.After dynamometer testing is completed,turn the TCS system back on by pressingthe TCS switch again.

smhma-7.p65 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM2

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTEREGR SYSTEM

!H010E01Y-AAT

(If installed)

This system helps reduce nitrogen oxides byrecirculating a part of the exhaust gas into theengine, thereby reducing cylinder combustiontemperature, which results in lower output ofoxides of nitrogen.

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter orany other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer isyour best source of assistance.

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons andnitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust maycause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

H020A01O

Catalytic Converter

smhma-7.p65 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM3

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4

! WARNING:o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-

bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

smhma-7.p65 3/9/2005, 4:27 PM4

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures ............... 8-3Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-7Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9Tire Chains.................................................................. 8-10Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-11Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-12Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-13Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13Consumer Information ................................................. 8-14Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-17

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

88

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01O-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in three different places on yourcar:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

I010A01O

2.7 V6

I010B01B

I010B01L

3.5 V6

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's bookletincluded with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

!

I030A02JM-AAT

RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-TION PRESSURES

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

I030A01O

WARNING:Severe underinflation (10 psi (70 kPa)or more) can lead to severe heatbuildup, causing blowouts, treadseparation and other tire failures thatcan result in the loss of vehicle con-trol leading to severe injury or death.This risk is much higher on hot daysand when driving for protracted peri-ods at high speeds.

I030A02O-A

I030A03O-A

Type A

Type B


4

! CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more than 1mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Never overload your vehicle. Beespecially careful about overload-ing if you equip your vehicle witha luggage rack.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

!WARNING:

Overinflation or underinflation canreduce the tire life, adversely affectvehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult inloss of vehicle control and potentialinjury.

NOTE:o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by yourHyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.


5

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading information

label, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gauge. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01O-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1


6

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size

(example: P225/70R16 101T)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.o Three-digit number (225): This num-

ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (70): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Three digit number (101): This num-ber is the tire's load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support.

o T: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. It indicates thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture


7

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-14.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.


8

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the same mold-ings on the other sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire uponwhich the tire beads are seated.


9

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand dividing by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantially reduced in snow andice. Summer tires do not have the tiretraction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire side wall. If you plan to operateyour vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewall,whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.


10

HA1409

I060A02O-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check wheel nut torque.

Spare tire

!I050A02O-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. If yourvehicle is equipped with 4WD (fourwheels drive), be sure to install thechains on all wheels. Be sure that thechains are installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph.

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

o Don't use a tire chains to the ve-hicle which aluminium wheels areinstalled to keep the wheels. If it ison unavoidable circumstances,use a wire chains.

WARNING:o Use wire chains less than 15mm to

prevent damage to the chain'sconnection.

o If you have noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles.

!


11

!I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

WARNING:Do not mix bias-ply and radial-plyunder any circumstances. This maycause unusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death, seri-ous injury, or property damage.

HSM5013

I090A02JM-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc., The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

Tread wearindicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)


12

I090B01JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire shoud always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

!WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.

! WARNING:o Your vehicle is equipped with tires

designed to provide for safe rideand handling capability.Do not use a size and type of tireand wheel that is different from theone that is originally installed onyour vehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehicle,which could lead to handling fail-ure or rollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sureto equip all four tires with the tireand wheel of the same size, type,tread, brand and load-carryingcapacity. If you nevertheless de-cide to equip your vehicle withany tire/wheel combination not rec-ommended by Hyundai for off-road driving, you should not usethese tires for highway driving.


13

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

D060B01O

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

I120A02A-AAT

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles LimitedWarranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Lim-ited Powertrain Warranty (original owneronly).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System War-

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty Federal

vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Lim-

ited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is providedin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.


14

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

! WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.


15

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

I130D04A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151


16

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North Caro-lina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas,Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Mis-souri, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Ken-tucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, NorthDakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor ve-hicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon,Texas, Utah, Washington.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151


17

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.sections 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court havingjurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

BINDING ARBITRATION

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J060A01O-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J050A01O-AAT

BRAKE

J030A02O-AAT

TIRE

J020A01O-AAT

POWER STEERING

J010A02O-AAT

MEASUREMENT

177.1 (4500)

71.5 (1820)

65.2(1655)/67.3(1710)*

65.9(1675)/68.1(1730)*

103.1 (2620)

60.6 (1540)

60.6 (1540)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.5 in. (142 mm)

Vane type

Tire pressure

30 (207)

Tire

Standard

Spare

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Disc type

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

19 us.gal (15.8 imp.gal, 72 liter)

psi (kpa)

Size

225/70 R16

Full Size

Fuel tank capacity

2WD

4WD

* With roof rack

in. (mm)

J040A04O-AAT

ELECTRICAL

Item

Battery

Generator

2.7 V6 3.5 V6

MF 68 AH (12 V)

120A (13.5 V)

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3ENGINE

3.5 V6

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.66 x 3.38 (93 x 85.8)

213.4 (3,497)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

BTDC 10° ± 5°

J070A03O-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke in. (mm)

Displacement cu.in. (cc)

Firing order

Spark plug

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing (base)

2.7 V6

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.41 x 2.95 (86.7 x 75)

162.1 (2,656)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

BTDC 12° ± 5°

SPECIFICATIONS

0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)

Type

Gap

CHAMPION : RC10PYPB4

NGK : PFR5N-11

700 ± 100

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Coolant Standard

SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification

approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)

API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)

PSF-3 type fluid

DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A06O-AAT

ITEM

Engine

Recommends

Transaxle

Coolant

Transfer case

Rear axle

Power steering

Brake fluid

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

5

8.98 (7.48, 8.5)

0.85 (0.7, 0.8)

1.16 (0.97,1.1)

7.4 (6.16, 7)

0.95 (0.79, 0.9)

ITEM

Engine

Transaxle

Coolant

Transfer case

Rear axle

Power steering

Brake fluid

J080A06O-AAT

2.7 V6

Drain & refill;

Without oil filter : 4.44 (3.7, 4.2)

With oil filter : 4.76 (3.96, 4.5)

3.5 V6

Drain & refill;

Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4)

With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3)

8.66 (7.21, 8.2)

1.06 (0.88, 1)

Quantity (US. QTS) (lmp.qts, liter)

As required

10

INDEX

10

10 INDEX

2

AAdvanced Supplemental Restraint(AIRBAG) System(SRS) ...........1-34Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-11Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-16Operation ............................................................................ 1-99, 6-16Switch ........................................................................................... 1-98

Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-138Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-67Audio System

Cassete tape player operation (D-285) ................................... 1-121Compact disc player operation (H260) .................................... 1-114Compact disc player operation (D-285) ................................... 1-125Compact disc player operation (D-295) ................................... 1-131Stereo radio operation (H260) .................................................. 1-111Stereo radio operation (D-285) ................................................ 1-118Stereo radio operation (D-295) ................................................ 1-128

Azimuth Compass .............................................................................1-63

BBattery ..................................................................................... 2-22, 6-22Binding Arbitration .............................................................................8-17Brake

Anti-lock brake system(ABS) ......................................................2-13Brake traction control system (BTCS) ........................................ 2-13Checking the brakes ....................................................................6-15Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-15Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-29Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-19

Practices ......................................................................................2-19Breaking-In your New Hyundai .......................................................... 1-3

CCare of Cassette Tapes ................................................................ 1-135Care of Discs ................................................................................. 1-135Cargo Security Screen .....................................................................1-81Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3Center Console Box ..........................................................................1-73Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-7Child Restraint System .....................................................................1-26

Installing a child restraint seat with the"Tether Anchorage" system .....................................................1-28

Securing the child restraint seat with the "ISOFIX" system ....... 1-29Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................1-66Climate Control Air Filter ....................................................... 1-108, 6-17Clock ................................................................................................. 1-63Combination Light

Auto light .......................................................................................1-59Headlight flasher ..........................................................................1-59Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-58High-beam switch ........................................................................1-58Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-58Parking light auto off .....................................................................1-58Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-57

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-14Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-23

10INDEX

3

Corrosion protectionCleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control ...................................................................................1-89

DDefrosting / Defogging ................................................................... 1-101Door

Central door locks .......................................................................... 1-7Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-88Locking, unlocking front door with a key ...................................... 1-5

Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-67Drive Belts .........................................................................................6-19Driving

Driving for economy ..................................................................... 2-20Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-21Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-22

EEmission Control System ................................................................... 7-2Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3Compartment (2.7 V6) ................................................................... 6-2Compartment (3.5 V6) ................................................................... 6-3Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-8Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-52

If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4Number ........................................................................................... 8-2Oil ................................................................................................... 6-4Starting ........................................................................................... 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ..................................................2-2

FFan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-93Floor Mat Anchor ..............................................................................1-86Fog Light

Front .............................................................................................1-62Front Seats

Adjustable front seats ..................................................................1-12Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-13Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..........................................1-12Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-12

FuelAuto fuel cut switch ...................................................................... 1-84Capacity .........................................................................................9-2Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-52Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................................ 1-84

Full Traction Control System (FTCS) .............................................. 2-15Full-time 4WD Operation ..................................................................2-16Fuses ................................................................................................6-20

10 INDEX

4

GGeneral Checks .................................................................................. 6-4Glove Box ..........................................................................................1-72

HHazard Warning System ..................................................................1-62Heating and Cooling Control ............................................................. 1-92Heating and Ventilation

Air flow control ..............................................................................1-94Air intake control switch ...............................................................1-93Bi-level heating .............................................................................1-98Defrosting / Defogging .............................................................. 1-101Fan speed control (Blower control) .............................................1-93Temperature control ....................................................................1-97

High-Mounted Rear Stop Light .........................................................1-83Homelink Mirror .................................................................................1-76Hood Release ....................................................................................1-85Horn ................................................................................................. 1-88

IIgnition Switch ......................................................................................2-4Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-46Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) .......................................1-65Interior Light .......................................................................................1-71

JJump Starting ......................................................................................3-3

KKeys ................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-15Positions ......................................................................................... 2-4

LLight Bulbs Replacement ..................................................................6-26Limited-Slip Differential ...................................................................... 2-19Luggage Compartment Light ............................................................1-81Luggage Net ......................................................................................1-82

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2

MirrorsDay-night inside rearview mirror ................................................. 1-76Outside rearview mirror ...............................................................1-73

OOdometer / Trip Odometer ...............................................................1-53

PParking Brake ....................................................................................1-80Power Driver's Seat ..........................................................................1-14Power Outlet ......................................................................................1-66Power Steering Fluid Level ...............................................................6-23

10INDEX

5

RRear Seat

Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-17Folding rear seatback and seat cushion .................................... 1-17

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-62Reporting Safety Defects .................................................................8-16Risk of Rollover ................................................................................... 2-3Roof Rack .........................................................................................1-83

SSeat

Front ............................................................................................. 1-12Rear .............................................................................................. 1-17Seat warmer ................................................................................. 1-16

Seat Belts3-point system .............................................................................1-22Pretensioner seat belt .................................................................. 1-32Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-24Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-21Precautions .................................................................................. 1-19

Shop Manual ......................................................................................8-13Sound

Brake pad warning sound ............................................................1-51Parking start warning sound ........................................................1-51

Spark Plugs ....................................................................................... 6-10Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-53Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-6Steering Wheel Free play .................................................................6-18Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .................................................................. 1-87

Stereo Sound System .................................................................... 1-108Sunglass Holder ................................................................................1-72Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-69Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-86

TTachometer .......................................................................................1-53Tail Gate ............................................................................................1-80

Tail gate window ...........................................................................1-81Theft-Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-8Tires

Balancing ......................................................................................8-11Chains ..........................................................................................8-10Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-6If you have a flat tire .......................................................................3-6Information ......................................................................................8-2Maintenance .................................................................................8-12Pressure .........................................................................................8-3Replacement ................................................................................8-11Rotation ........................................................................................ 8-10Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-9Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5Terminology and definitions ...........................................................8-7Traction ........................................................................................ 8-11

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-24Emergency ...................................................................................3-14If your vehicle must be towed ......................................................3-12

Traction Control System ................................................................... 2-13

10 INDEX

6

TransaxleAutomatic .............................................................................. 2-6, 2-19Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-13

Trip Computer ...................................................................................1-55

VVehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2Vehicle Load Limit .............................................................................2-28Vehicle Specifications

Engine ............................................................................................. 9-3Lubrication chart ............................................................................ 9-4Measurement ................................................................................. 9-2

WWarning and Indicator Lights ............................................................1-48Windows

Power ........................................................................................... 1-11Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-60

Rear window wiper and washer ..................................................1-61Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................................6-11

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Seoul Korea

Printing: DEC. 26, 2005Publication No.: A26O-EU5DGPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 19 (15.8, 72)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-14.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuelefficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperaturesare above 0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate withHYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai MotorCo.. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehiclelimited warranty.

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2o Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-48 ~ 1-51o Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-12o Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-5o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4o Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-15

smhma-11 - hyundai...restraint system control module (srscm) or airbag control unit (acu), may...

Documents